Samsung Smg 3200 Users Manual

SMG-3200 to the manual 3985ee3f-1d7e-4455-8d0d-1400d41f13e5

2015-01-23

: Samsung Samsung-Smg-3200-Users-Manual-281408 samsung-smg-3200-users-manual-281408 samsung pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 228 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

SAMSUNG

SMG-3200

USER GUIDE

SAMSUNG MEDIA GATEWAY

Publication Information

Samsung Telecoms reserves the right without prior notice to revise infor-

mation in this publication for any reason.

Samsung Telecoms also reserves the right without prior notice to make

changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manu-

facturing may warrant.

Disclaimer

Samsung Telecoms is not responsible for errors or problems arising from

customers not installing, programming or operating their Samsung sys-

tems as described in this manual.

Samsung Telecoms (U.K.) Limited

or by any means – graphic, electronic or mechanical, including recording,

taping, photocopy or information retrieval system – without express writ-

ten permission of the publisher of this material.

Part No.:16320 Version 1.0

EU Declaration of Conformity (LVD,EMC)

For the following product:

Product Name: VoIP Media Gateway

Model Name: SMG-3200

Manufactured at:

Factory Name, Address: Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd, 259 Gongdan-Dong, Gumi-City Kyungbuk,

Korea 730-030

We hereby declare that all major safety requirements concerning the CE Marking Direc

tive [93/68/EEC] and

Low Voltage Directive [73/23/EEC], ElectroMagnetic Compatibility [89/336/EEC], amend

ments [92/31/EEC]

are fulfilled, as laid out in the guidelines set down by the member states of the EEC Commission.

This declaration is valid for all samples that are part of this declaration, which are manu

factured according to

the production charts appendix.

The standards relevant for the evaluation of safety & EMC requirements are as follows:

1. Certificate of conformity / Test report issued by:

LVD : EN60950:1992 +A1+A2+A3+A4+A11

EMC : EN55022:1998, EN 61000-3-2:1995 inc+A1+A2:1998,

EN61000-3-3:1995, EN 55024:1998, AS/NZS3548:1995

2. Technical documentation kept at:

LVD: VDE

EMC: SAMSUNG Electronics EURO Q.A. Lab. in the U.K.

which will be made available upon request.

Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd

(Manufacturer)

Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd,

259 Gongdan-Dong, Gumi-City

Kyungbuk, Korea 730-030

2002-03-14 TE Jang Tae-eok Jang / General Manager

(place and date of issue) (name and signature of authorised person)

(Representative in the EU)

Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab.

Blackbushe Business Park

Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire

GU46 6GG, UK

2002-03-18 IS Lee In-Seop Lee / Senior Manager

(place and date of issue) (name and signature of authorised person)

Before You Begin

This guide is intended for anyone who installs and uses the SMG-3200. It provides an introduction

to the SMG-3200 system as well as network setup and maintenance.

Both the novice and expert user in switching systems should first read this guide before

installing the SMG-3200 system, and pay particular attention to the precautionary notes.

This guide describes in detail the structure and the installation of the SMG-3200 system with

illustrations to assist you.

Caution: Fatal problems, such as the loss of significant data or network service disconnection, may occur

if you make modifications to the hardware and board configurations other than those described

in this manual. If you have any inquiries or find any faults with the system, please contact your

system supplier.

About This Guide

This guide comprises seven chapters and three appendices. It explains the functions and features of

the system, and describes installation procedures. It is organized so that you can easily access

information by topic of your choice.

It is best to read this guide from the beginning to the end for safe installation of the SMG-3200.

Summaries of the chapters and appendices follow.

Chapter 1, Overview describes the various functions of the system, and lists the advantages of

the system.

Chapter 2, System Boards explains the board types and board features.

Chapter 3, Installing the System provides instructions for installing the system, placing the

boards in the slots, and connecting the cables to the system.

Chapter 4, Configuring the System shows how to set up the basic information to use the

system.

Chapter 5,

CLI (Command Line Interface) describes the CLI that enables operational settings

for the SMG-3200. An overview of menus followed by the functions of each menu and

settings of submenus are given.

Chapter 6, Web-based Remote Management explains how to log in to the web management

interface of the SMG-3200.

Chapter 7, Using the CDR (Call Detail Record) explains how to view or receive the call

information through the CDR which is provided by the SMG-3200 system.

Appendix A, Call Termination Code describes the form of Call Termination Code and code

information.

Appendix B, System Information (DataBase) File Structure provides the hierarchy and usage of

the text file which enables backup, restore, and editing of SMG-3200 system

information.

Appendix C, Glossary provides definitions of terms used in this guide.

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Overview

······························· 1-1

Introduction to SMG-3200· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1-1

SMG-3200 Features································· 1-2

Components of SMG-3200 ································ 1-4

Front View of SMG-3200 ······························ 1-4

Rear View of SMG-3200 ······························ 1-5

SMG-3200 System Specifications ···························· 1-6

Hardware Specifications ······························ 1-6

Software Specifications ······························· 1-7

VoIP Network Configuration Using SMG-3200 ···················· 1-8

Tandem Gateway Mode······························· 1-8

Standalone Gateway Mode····························· 1-9

Chapter 2 System Boards

·························· 2-1

Types of Boards

····································· 2-1

Common Boards·································· 2-1

Universal Boards ·································· 2-1

Common Boards

····································· 2-2

MGCB Board ···································· 2-2

VOIP Board ····································· 2-8

Universal Boards

···································· 2-11

LOOP Board····································· 2-11

E&M Board ····································· 2-12

SLC Board······································ 2-15

Chapter 3 Installing the System

······················ 3-1

Procedures on Installing the System ··················· 3-1

Condition of the Installation Location

······················ 3-2

Space Condition ·································· 3-2

Grounding Condition ································ 3-3

Input Power Condition ······························· 3-4

Line Condition···································· 3-4

Unpacking the System

································· 3-5

Installing in a Rack

··································· 3-6

iii

Safety Precautions ································· 3-6

Rack Requirements ································ 3-7

Required Tools ··································· 3-7

Installing in a Rack ································· 3-8

Connecting Ground Cable ································ 3-9

Installing Boards ····································· 3-10

System Slots ···································· 3-10

Selecting Boards ·································· 3-11

Setting Jumper and Switch ···························· 3-12

Installing Daughter Boards ···························· 3-13

Installing Board in a Slot ····························· 3-16

Connecting Cables ···································· 3-18

Attaching Ferrite Cores ································· 3-21

Connecting Power Cable ································ 3-21

Chapter 4 Configuring the System

···················· 4-1

Setting up the Terminal ·································· 4-1

Terminal Features ································· 4-1

Starting SMG-3200

···································· 4-3

Turning on ······································ 4-3

Logging in ······································ 4-4

Configuring the Operating Environment

····················· 4-6

Configuring the TCP/IP ······························ 4-6

Configuring the System Operation Mode ···················· 4-11

Configuring the VoIP································ 4-17

Chapter 5 CLI (Command Line Interface)

··············· 5-1

Menu Configuration ···································· 5-1

Using Menus

········································ 5-3

System Configuration Menu

····························· 5-4

[0]DHCP Client Setting ······························ 5-5

[1] Network Configuration ····························· 5-6

[2 Login ID Configuration ····························· 5-8

[3] System Upgrade ································ 5-9

[4] Display Package Information ························· 5-11

[5] Default DB Setting ······························· 5-12

[6] Restart System ································· 5-13

[7] Exit · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5-13

PSTN Configuration Menu

····························· 5-14

[0] Gateway Operation Mode ··························· 5-16

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit ························· 5-19

[2] PCM Method ·································· 5-20

[3] Dial Method ··································· 5-21

[4] SLC Signal···································· 5-23

[5] Trunk Signal ··································· 5-24

[6] Call Control Method ······························ 5-28

[7] Ring Cadence·································· 5-30

[8] System Tone Cadence····························· 5-32

[9] CO Tone Cadence ······························· 5-34

[10] Gain Control ·································· 5-36

[11] Diagnosis···································· 5-38

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock ·························· 5-39

[13] Display Slot Configuration ·························· 5-41

[14] Display Port Status ······························ 5-42

[15] Save & Exit··································· 5-44

[16] Exit········································ 5-44

VoIP Configuration Menu

······························ 5-45

[0] VoIP General Option ······························ 5-46

[1] VoIP DSP Option ································ 5-49

[2] VoIP Gatekeeper Option ··························· 5-52

[3] VoIP Routing Table ······························· 5-55

[4] VoIP Caller ID Table ······························ 5-59

[5] VoIP Remote IP Table ····························· 5-60

[6] VoIP Remote IP Status ···························· 5-62

[7] Save & Exit ··································· 5-64

[8] Exit ········································ 5-64

CLI Command Menu

·································· 5-65

Chapter 6 Web-based Remote Management

················ 6-1

Before you Begin

····································· 6-1

············································· 6-1

Configuration and Functions of Menu

······················ 6-4

Chapter 7 Using the CDR (Call Detail Record)

·········· 7-1

Screen for checking current call information· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 7-1

How to receive call information - TCP Link · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 7-2

How to receive call information - UDP Link ················ 7-5

CDR Form

··········································· 7-7

Appendix A Call Termination Code

· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · A-1

CDR Form

········································ A-1

Call Termination Code

·································A-2

Appendix B System Information (Database)

File Structure

·························· B-1

File Structure

······································ B-1

Hierarchical structure ······························ B-1

Syntax structure ································· B-3

Appendix C Glossary

· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · C-1

1-1

Chapter 1 Overview

This chapter describes the various functions of the SMG-3200 system, its component parts, and

system specifications to provide you with a good understanding of the system.

Introduction to the SMG-3200

SMG-3200 VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) gateway system is a high performance H.323

compliant gateway optimized for voice communication over the Internet.

SMG-3200 enables transmission of both voice and FAX data from a PSTN (Public Switched

Telephone Network) through real-time data compression and protocol conversion. Therefore, it

enables seamless integration of voice and data networks, simple network architecture design and

considerable cost reduction in network infrastructure construction. Also, it can provide long-

distance and international telephone services at local telephone rates for users in an Internet or

Intranet environment.

Since SMG-3200 is designed based on hardware and software modules, it is easy to install.

Installation of trunks, subscriber lines or new software for additional features is possible, even during

operation if necessary.

SMG-3200 provides local/remote CLI (Command Line Interface). To use SMG-3200 after

installing the hardware, only a basic information configuration for system operation using CLI

commands is needed, while the remaining operating environment configuration is automatically

configured using default values. Providing conversational type CLI, SMG-3200 enables easier

system configuration even if a user is not accustomed to the Gateway system.

1-2

Chapter 1

Overview

SMG-3200 Features

The SMG-3200 system has the following major features.

PSTN InterfacesPSTN Interfaces

The SMG-3200 system provides the following PSTN interfaces for interoperability with PSTN.

 LOOP Analog Tr unk Interface

 E1/PRI, T1 Digital Station Interface (PBX, KTS Interface)

 E&M Analog Station Interface (PBX, KTS Interface)

 SLC Analog Interface

VoIP InterfacesVoIP Interfaces

VoIP is a technology that enables simultaneous transmission of both voice and data over the

Internet, and enables Internet telephony service. The SMG-3200 system offers the following VoIP

interfaces.

 H.323-V3 VoIP Interface

 Gatekeeper Interface (RAS)

 Real Time Internet Fax Support (FoIP)

Trunk Routing FunctionsTrunk Routing Functions

The SMG-3200 system offers the following trunk functions including trunk routing, trunk tandem,

and access code control.

 Trunk Routing

Ÿ LCR (Lease Cost Routing) code and route control

Ÿ Dynamic rerouting depending on the traffic load of PSTN and Internet Protocol state

Ÿ Routing Table

 Trunk Tandem

Ÿ Various PSTN and VoIP trunks connection

Ÿ Interoperability among analog trunk, digital station, and VoIP network

1-3

 Access Code Control

Ÿ IP address translation based on access code and prefix number

Call Processing FunctionsCall Processing Functions

The SMG-3200 system provides the following call processing functions.

 R2 Signaling and DTMF Signaling

 Caller ID Relay between PSTN and VoIP

 DTMF Relay between PSTN and VoIP

 CDR (Call Detail Record) Generation

 RTP Traffic Channel Status Monitoring Functions (Delay, Loss, and Link Down)

System Management FunctionsSystem Management Functions

The SMG-3200 system provides a GUI interface, and a Standard Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) for easier management. The SMG-3200 also provides the following system management

functions.

 Web-based Management

 Program change by TFTP Loading

 DHCP Client (IP address allocation by DHCP server)

 FTP, Telnet Interface

 CLI (Command Line Interface)

1-4

Chapter 1

Overview

Components of SMG-3200

This section explains each component and function of the SMG-3200 system.

Front View of SMG -3200

There are 4 slots for board installation on the front of the SMG-3200 system.

SlotSlot DescriptionDescription

MGCB For the installation of the MGCB board that controls overall operation of the

SMG-3200 system.

VOIP For the installation of the VoIP board offering VoIP gateway functions.

US1

US2

For the installation of Universal boards (LOOP, E&M, and SLC boards) offering

trunk and subscriber terminal communication functions.

MGCB Slot

VOIP Slot

US1 Slot

US2 Slot

1-5

Rear View of SMG-3200

The rear side of the SMG-3200 system includes a ground terminal, power-in terminal, and power

switch.

Ground Connector

Provides an external ground connection to protect user and system against lightning, static

electric charges, spikes, sags, and surges.

Power Connector

Provides power supply cable connection. It requires AC 110-240V main power.

Power Switch

A switch to turn the system power on/off.

1-6

Chapter 1

Overview

SMG-3200 System Specifications

This section describes hardware and software specifications of the SMG-3200 system.

Hardware Specifications

Feature Description

Processor MPC860 50MHz

Memory

Ÿ Boot Flash ROM : 512KB

Ÿ Flash Memory : 8MB

Ÿ SDRAM : 16MB

VoIP DSP 2 ~ 8 of Audio Codes AC4804

Network 10Base-T/100 Base-TX

Test Port RS-232C

System

Power Ÿ Input : AC 110-240V

Ÿ Output : -48V(25W), +5V(10W), +3.3V(15W)

Analog

Ÿ Loop : 8/16 Channel

Ÿ SLC : 8/16 Channel

Ÿ E&M : 8/16 Channel

Digital

Ÿ T1 : 24 Channel

Ÿ E1 : 30 Channel

Ÿ PRI : 30 Channel

Ÿ R2 : 8 Channel

Ÿ DTMF : 4 Channel

Line Capacity

VoIP

Ÿ 8/16/24/32 Channel

- G.723.1, G.729A,G.711

- Fax channel receives maximum of 8 channels.

- Fax channel receives maximum of 6 channels when

G.711 codec is used.

1-7

Software Specifications

Feature Description

OS VxWorks

VoIP Protocol ITU-T H.323-V3

VoIP Codec G.723.1, G.729A, G.711

Audio Function

Ÿ Echo Cancellation (G.165)

Ÿ Silence Suppression (VAD, CNG)

Ÿ DTMF Detection/Generation(In/Outband)

Ÿ Selectable A / u law

Ÿ Gain/Volume Control

Ÿ Dynamic Jitter Control

VoIP Function

Ÿ H.323-V3 Interoperability (RADVision)

Ÿ G3 Internet FAX Relay (FRF.11, T.38)

Ÿ External Gatekeeper RAS Interface

Ÿ Internal Gatekeeper Functions (Control Code Translate/Add/Delete)

Ÿ Flexible Numbering Plan

Ÿ Caller ID (G/W ID, IP, ANI, Assigned Caller ID)

Ÿ QoS Functions (Delay/Loss/Link Down Check, RTP Multiframe, IP TOS)

System

Management

Ÿ DHCP Client Functions to Enable Automatic IP Address Allocation

Ÿ Remote Program Upgrade

Ÿ FTP, TFTP, Telnet Network Interface

Ÿ Easy Install (Default Configuration)

Ÿ Diagnostic and Alarm Report

Ÿ Local/Network CLI Interface

Ÿ System Maintenance Through NMS Manager Center

- GUI, SNMP, Web Management

- DB List and Change

1-8

Chapter 1

Overview

VoIP Network Configuration Using SMG-2000

A VoIP network can be constructed using SMG-3200, PBX, and KTS as the following figure

shows.

Tandem Gateway Mode

The SMG-3200 can be run in the tandem gateway mode. It connects the SMG-3200 to PBX or

KTS, and uses the SMG-3200 as a gateway without internal subscribers.

1-9

Standalone Gateway Mode

The SMG-3200 can be run in the standalone gateway mode. It connects a telephone to an SLC port

on the SMG-3200 and uses the system as a VoIP Gateway with internal subscribers.

2-1

Chapter 2 System Boards

This Chapter describes the types of boards available for the SMG-3200, and the functions and

features of each board.

Types of Boards

There are two types of boards available for the SMG-3200.

Common Boards

Common boards have to be installed in the SMG-3200 system. They provide important

functions such as operational control of the system, and VoIP gateway functions. Common

boards include the following two boards.

*MGCB (Media Gateway Control Board) board

*VOIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) board

Universal Boards

Universal board may be installed depending on the user’s need. US1 and US2 system slot is

intended for Universal boards. Universal boards include the following three boards.

*LOOP (Loop Start Trunk) board

*E&M (E&M Tie Trunk Module) board

*SLC (Subscriber Line Circuit) board

2-2 Chapter 2

System Boards

Common Boards

Common boards of the SMG-3200 system include the MGCB board and VOIP board. This section

describes the features of each board.

MGCB Board

MGCB (Media Gateway Control Board) board controls the entire operation of the SMG-3200

system, and is installed in the MGCB system slot.

Three memories are installed in the MGCB board.

*512KB Flash Memory : Booting program is stored.

*8MB Flash Memory : Database used by the SMG-3200 system is saved in.

*16MB SDRAM : The place where the system software is run.

The features and functions of the MGCB board are as follows.

yOperational control of installed boards in the system

yDetection and generation of 16 DTMF

yGeneration of 7 call progressing tones

yOffering 256x256 channel time slot

yProviding digital station interfaces and R2 signaling

yOffering a 10/100Mbps LAN port, and RS232C port

2-3

RS-232CLAN

MGCB

E1/T1/PRI

PWR

L1 L2 LAN

TX LAN

OPER E1

SYNC E1

LOS

1 2 3 4

S3 S5

Front Panel and Structure of Board

There are E1/PRI, T1 ports, LAN port, RS-232C port, and system status LEDs on the MGCB

board. There are 8 DIP switches on the board.

❶E1/PRI, T1 Port (RJ-45): for E1/PRI, T1 station line connection.

❷LAN Port (RJ-45): for 10/100Mbps Ethernet LAN connection. It is connected to network

equipment such as a hub or switch.

❸RS-232C Port: for system setup and testing using CLI (Command Line Interface). It is

usually connected to the serial port of a PC.

2-4 Chapter 2

System Boards

❹LED Indicators

LED

LEDLED

LED Color

ColorColor

Color Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

L1 LED blinks during system initialization.

L2 LED blinks during normal system operation.

PWR LED is on when power is normally supplied to system.

OPER LED blinks during system software operation.

LAN TX LED blinks during data transmission through LAN port.

LAN RX LED blinks during data reception through LAN port.

E1 SYNC LED is on if D-TRK clock synchronization fails.

E1 LOS

Green

LED is on if D-TRK signal is missing.

rDIP Switch

Switch

SwitchSwitch

Switch Default

DefaultDefault

Default Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

S1 OFF Reserved

S2 OFF Reserved

S3 OFF Reserved

S4 OFF For D-TRK clock signal input, set to ON. Set to ON state during

an offline test (used in factory)

S5 OFF For D-TRK signal data input, set to ON.

OFF 1, 2 : BPS 0, 1 : 8bit operation

ON 3 : IP 0 : MSR[IP] initial value is one

OFF 4 : EARP 0 : Internal operation

OFF

ON Reserved.

S7 OFF

OFF 3, 4 : ISB 1, 0 : Base address 0xFF000000

ON Reserved.

S8 ON

ON 3, 4 : DBPC 0, 0 : Debug Port Configuration

2-5

If you change the S6,S7,S8 , the SMG-3200 system doesn

’

t work normally.

R2 Board Installation Slot

This slot is intended for the installation of the R2 board, a daughter board of the MGCB board.

You can find detailed information about the R2 board in the following section.

E1/PRI, T1 Board Installation Slot

This slot is intended for the installation of the E1/PRI, T1 board, a daughter board of the

MGCB board. You can find detailed information about the E1/PRI, T1 board in the following

section.

Daughter Boards of MGCB Board

Daughter boards of MGCB board include the E1/PRI, T1 board and R2 board. This section

describes the features of each daughter board.

R2 Board

The R2 board provides and 8 channels R2 signaling through a digital trunk (E1).

E1/PRI, T1 Board

The E1/PRI, T1 board provides interfaces to connect E1, ISDN PRI, or T1 station lines to an

SMG-3200 system.

Configuring DIP switch and jumper executes the software for E1 or ISDN PRI service

automatically. T1 board is also setup automatically by software when installed.

The E1 is a high-speed digital line with a data transmission rate of 2.048Mbps. The E1 offers 32

separated communication channels. 30 channels are used for PCM data communication at 64Kbps,

and 2 channels are used for communication signaling.

2-6 Chapter 2

System Boards

JP1

JP2 JP4

JP3 JP5

The T1 is a high-speed digital line with a data transmission rate of 1.544Mbps. The T1 offers 24

separated communication channels. Each channel is used for PCM data communication at 64Kbps.

The PRI (Primary Rate Interface) includes T1, and E1 type stations, but the SMG-3200 only

provides E1 type PRI. E1 type PRI offers 30B channels and 1D channel (30B+1D). Each channel

provides 64Kbps data communication.

❶DIP Switch

Switch

SwitchSwitch

Switch Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

S1 and S2 switches are intended to select Card ID according to the line type

connected to the E1/PRI, T1 board.

yTo connect E1,

☞ Set both S1 and S2 switches to ON.

yTo connect T1,

☞ Set S1 switch to ON, and set S2 switch to OFF.

yTo connect E1 type PRI,

☞ Set S1 switch to OFF, and set S2 switch to ON.

2-7

❷JP1 ~ JP5 Jumper

Jumper

JumperJumper

Jumper Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

JP1

JP2

JP3

JP4

JP5

JP1~JP5 jumpers are intended to specify impedance mapping according to the

type of line to be connected to the E1/PRI, T1 board.

yTo connect E1,

☞ Close pin #2-3 of all jumpers.

yTo connect T1,

☞ Close pin #1-2 of all jumpers.

yTo connect E1 type PRI,

☞ Close pin #2-3 of all jumpers.

2-8 Chapter 2

System Boards

VOIP Board

The VOIP board performs conversion of the voice data of PSTN into packet data that can be

transmitted over IP networks. In other words, it provides H.323 V3-complient VoIP Gateway

functions to enable voice communication over the Internet. The VOIP board of the SMG-3200

system comes in a VOIP board with 8 Internet telephone channels.

On the VOIP board with 8 Internet telephone channels, up to 3 VOIP_Sub boards can be installed,

and each VOIP_Sub board provides 8 Internet telephone channels. As a result, besides the 8

Internet telephone channels of the VOIP board, a maximum of 24 additional Internet telephone

channels can be installed on a board.

The features and functions of the VOIP board are as follows.

yG.729A, G.723.1, G.711 audio codec support

yInternet FAX support

yCaller ID detection and generation function

yFAX/data auto-detection

yG.165 compliance, 16ms echo canceler

yDTMF detection and generation function

y u-Law/A-Law support

yInput/Output Gain Control

yVAD/CNG support

2-9

VOIP

16CH 32CH LD2 LD4 LD6 LD8

8CH 24CH LD1 LD3 LD5 LD7

Loc3

Loc2

Loc1

Front Panel and Structure of Board

There are LEDs indicating VOIP board status on the front panel of the VOIP board.

VOIP Board With 8 Channels

❶LED Indicators

LED

LEDLED

LED Color

ColorColor

Color Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

8CH LED is on when VOIP board is installed in system slot.

16CH LED is on when the first daughter board is installed on VOIP board.

24CH LED is on when the second daughter board is installed on VOIP

board.

32CH

Green

LED is on when the third daughter board is installed on VOIP board.

2-10 Chapter 2

System Boards

(Continued)

LED

LEDLED

LED Color

ColorColor

Color Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

LD1 LED blinks when VoIP software is in normal operation.

LD2 LED is on when it is connected with gatekeeper.

LD3 LED is on when major alarm occurs.

LD4 LED is on when minor alarm occurs.

LD5 Reserved.

LD6 Reserved.

LD7 LED blinks during VoIP channel service.

LD8

Green

LED is on when the entire VoIP channel is in use.

Daughter Board Installation Slots

Daughter board installation slot is dedicated to the installation of a VOIP_Sub board, the daughter

board of a VOIP board. The VOIP board has 3 daughter board installation slots. Therefore, up to 3

VOIP_Sub boards can be installed on the VOIP board.

Daughter Board of VoIP Board

The daughter board of the VOIP board that can be installed is called the VOIP_Sub board. This

section describes the features of the VOIP_Sub board.

VOIP_Sub Board

The VOIP_Sub board is daughter board for VoIP channel extension, and provides 8 Internet

telephone channels. A maximum of 24 additional Internet telephone channels can be installed on

the VOIP board.

2-11

Universal Boards

The Universal board may be installed in the US1 and US2 slots of the SMG-3200 system

depending on the user’s need. There are two types of Universal boards, trunk board and subscriber

board, which provide different services.

The following table shows the summary of each type of Universal board.

Card Type

Card TypeCard Type

Card Type Board Name

Board NameBoard Name

Board Name

Trunk Board Analog Board LOOP

Subscriber Board Analog Board E&M

SLC

In the following sections, detailed information about features, functions, front panel, and jumper

settings for each type of Universal board will be presented.

LOOP Board

The LOOP (Loop Start Trunk) board provides the local extension trunk interface, and can be

installed in the universal slot (US1, US2) of a system. The LOOP board for the SMG-3200 system

comes in a LOOP board with 8 ports. It provides a connection to a private branch exchange (PBX),

or the local telephone office.

The features and functions of the LOOP board are as follows.

yIt provides the signal detection function.

yImpedance matching circuits are built in.

yIt reads the status such as the HOS and Ring Detection, Tone Detection, and Polarity

Reverse Signal etc.

yIt converts the analog signal into a digital signal with the PCM method to send them to the

control module. It also converts the digital signal with the PCM method into an analog

signal.

yIt protects the SMG-3200 system from lightening or high voltages, AC voltage crossing etc.

2-12 Chapter 2

System Boards

Front Panel

LOOP Board with 8 ports

The following table shows the meaning of the LED indicators on the front panel of the LOOP

board.

LED

LEDLED

LED Color

ColorColor

Color Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

Green LED is on during each port in use.

E&M Board

The E&M (E&M Tie Trunk Module) board provides a 4-Wire E&M dedicated line for connection

of SMG-3200 system and private branch exchange (PBX) or key telephone system (KTS), and can

be installed in the universal slot (US1, US2) of a system. The E&M board for the SMG-3200

system comes in an E&M board or 4W E&M board with 8 ports.

The E&M board has two independent voice lines to send and receive the signal where this line is

used as a dedicated line. The sending side consists of a Tip and Ring while the receiving side

consists of a Tip1 and Ring1. Because signal and voice circuits are separated from each other, the

transformer does not need the DC power feeding. The DC signal generated in M-LEAD and also

detects in E-LEAD.

The E&M board is divided into the type 1 E&M and type 2 E&M according to the circuit ground

way. The type1 is used in the case of grounding on the opposite side. The type 2 is used in the case

of grounding on the access side of port.

The E&M board has 2 independent transformers to send/receive voice signal in each port. The

board’s hybrid is used for 4stage control gain in each port where the line interface controller

provides the relay point to control the M-LEAD signal and read/write logic.

LOOP

P1 P3 P5 P7

P2 P4 P6 P8

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8

2-13

The features and functions of the E&M board are as follows.

yTransformer and impedance matching circuits are built in.

yIt encodes the entered analog signal into the digital signal of the PCM method where the digital

signal is decoded into the analog signal on the system through the PCM method.

yThere is separate logic to the control port of the board.

yIt has an outgoing signal control logic and incoming signal Detection logic.

Front Panel and Structure of Board

E&M Board with 8 ports

2-14 Chapter 2

System Boards

BOA

GNC

nLED Indicators

LED

LEDLED

LED Color

ColorColor

Color Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

Green LED is on during each port in use.

❷J1~J8 Jumper

LED

LEDLED

LED Default

DefaultDefault

Default Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

J1~J8 jumpers are intended to select signaling type for each

port of E&M board.

yTo use TYPE I -Standard signaling,

☞ Close pin B-O and C-G.

yTo use TYPE I -Inverted signaling,

☞ Close pin B -C and G-O.

yTo use TYPE II –Standard signaling,

☞ Close pin A-O.

yTo use TYPE II -Inverted signaling,

☞ Open all pins.

If the power of the connected system is not

–

48V, open the shunt pin of C-B.

2-15

SLC Board

The SLC (Subscriber Line Circuit) board provides the connection between a general analog

telephone and the SMG-3200 system, and can be installed in the universal slot (US1, US2) of a

system. The SLC board for the SMG-3200 system comes in a SLC board with 8 ports, and each

port provides a connection to an analog telephone.

The features and functions of the SLC board are as follows.

yIt provides a current of -48VDC for the connected subscriber telephone.

yIt provides the ring signal that indicates the subscriber telephone is ringing.

yIt reads the hook ON/OFF status, dial pulse, Ring trip, call answer status of the subscriber

telephone.

yIt protects the subscriber circuit and SMG-3200 system from lightening or high voltages,

AC voltage crossing etc. that are generated from the subscriber line.

yIt converts the analog signal into a digital signal with the PCM method to send them to the

control module. It also converts the digital signal with the PCM method into an analog

signal.

yIt provides hybrid function to separate the sending path and receiving path from the analog

voice signal.

Front Panel

SLC Board with 8 ports

The following table shows the meaning of the LED indicators on the front panel of the SLC board.

LED

LEDLED

LED Color

ColorColor

Color Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

P1, P2, P3, P4

P5, P6, P7, P8 Green LED is on during each port in use.

SLC

P1 P3 P5 P7

P2 P4 P6 P8

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8

3-1

Chapter 3 Installing the System

This chapter provides SMG-3200 system installation procedures. First, step by step SMG-3200

system installation procedures are presented, and then environment configuration, board

installation, and power cable connecting procedures are explained.

Procedures on Installing the System

Following steps must be taken to install the SMG-3200 system.

1. Prepare the place to set up the system.

2. Move the packed system product to the installation place and unpack.

3. Installing in a rack. (Option)

4. Connect the grounding line.

5. Set up the jumper and install the daughter board of the board you want to load.

6. Install the board in a slot.

7. Connect cables.

8. Turn on the system after running a prior checkup.

Here are the detailed explanations of steps one to eight.

3-2 Chapter 3

Installing the System

Condition of the Installation Location

SMG-3200 system can be installed in a rack or on a table. To operate the SMG-3200 system

securely, you have to find the location that satisfies the conditions described in this chapter before

setting up the system.

Please do not place the unit on a table with a table cloth, and do not cover

the ventilation slots.

Space Condition

You have to select the location that satisfies the following conditions such as safety condition and

temperature/humidity condition.

Installation is to be performed by qualified service personnel only.

To be installed in Restricted Access Areas.

Safety Condition

yRemove the objects that are sensitive to fires such as explosive gas and flammable objects in the

exchange room.

yBefore setting up the system, check that every condition is satisfied such as the power wiring,

grounding, voltage, frequency, and etc.

yIf the power switch or circuit breaker is open, be sure to remove the power supply line’s

blocking route.

yIf the PSTN is connected with the system, set up the protection element in the MDF.

yIf subscriber cable goes outside, set up the protection element in the MDF.

yPlace a booklet that provides emergency measures, grate, artificial respiration and heart

resuscitation information in the exchange room to prepare for emergency cases such as electric

shock.

3-3

Temperature/Humidity Condition

yMaintain the consistent temperature and humidity.

*Temperature : 0oC – 45oC

*Humidity : 10% – 90% (non-condensing)

Should be in a cool place not exposed to direct sunlight.

yDuring or after setting up the system, equip a fan in the room in order to maintain the system by

preventing dust from going into.

Grounding Condition

You have to consider the followings when performing grounding operation.

yThe connection hole, connected with the SMG-3200 grounding conductor, should be connected

to the earth grounding through a fine earth-grounding medium.

yOverall, the power circulation status of the SMG-3200 system exposed electric conduction with

the metal face and the rectifier power plug’s grounding conductor should be exceedingly fine.

yA single contact point must be made to connect if the grounding of all of the exterior

supplementary equipment are connected to the system’s grounding.

yThe SMG-3200 grounding conductor should never be connected with the pipe for the interior

power wire.

yPower and ground standard must follow the national standard, and the installation office should

check whether the standard is kept.

yPower and grounding standards should suit the national standard where this are certified by an

installation organization.

3-4 Chapter 3

Installing the System

Input Power Condition

The input power of the SMG-3200 system needs to be supplied with the AC power.

In the SMG-3200 input power, an AC 110-240V should be supplied normal alternating current AC

power.

You should use the consent that supplies normal AC only for the SMG-3200 system. This consent

should not be used parallel with other devices. This consent should be located at a safe place to

prevent cutting off the power by mistake.

You should choose the power outlet suitable for the SMG-3200 capacity.

The standard of the SMG-3200 system is

yInput : AC 110-240V

yOutput : -48V(25W), +5V(10W), +3.3V(15W)

Line Condition

You need to take careful note of the following when installing cables.

y When wiring at a place where there is high humidity, take steps to reduce this to acceptable

levels before proceeding with the work.

Take care of the cable to prevent it from being deformed or damaged.

Make the line’s curvature radius to be 6 times larger than the cable’s circumference where there

have no repeating curved points.

yYou must take extreme precaution in the cable’s insulation overlap cases where the copper wire

are exposed and get entangled.

yThe maximum allowable line’s loop resister is not more than 1.8KOhm. The line’s leak resistor

must be over 20KOhm, the earth’s leak resistor must be over 20KOhm. (These conditions may

be ignored only in special cases.)

Analog and Digital subscribers are recommended to use 24AWG line.

yDo not place the line near a high voltage power line.

3-5

Unpacking the System

After preparing the place to install the SMG-3200 system and finishing all the preparation work by

meeting all the conditions, move the packed SMG-3200 system to the installation location.

Unpack the system and check if all the items are in the shipping carton. Basically, there should be

the following items in the package.

*SMG-3200 system that are separately packed

*Various separately packed boards

*2 Ferrite Core

*Power cable

*SMG-3200 User Guide

And, the remaining items can be different according to the orders. Compare closely the order form

and the items that you have. Please contact the distributor where you had bought the SMG-3200

system if there is any missing item or different item from the order form.

When you use a sharp tool to open the package, the item may be damaged.

Before open the top-cover, please make sure that the main cable is detached

from power line.

3-6 Chapter 3

Installing the System

Installing in a Rack

SMG-3200 system can be installed in a rack or on a table. Installation of SMG-3200 in a rack

enables more convenient usage and management. This section provides procedures for SMG-3200

system installation in a rack. For the case of SMG-3200 system installation on a table, skip this

section and refer to the following ‘Connecting Ground Cable’ section.

Safety Precautions

To ensure general safety, always follow these precautions before stalling the SMG-3200 on a rack.

yElevated Operating Ambient Temperature- The details should be provided so that

consideration shall be give to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the

manufacturer’s maximum rated ambient temperature (45°C).

yReduced Air Flow- Installation of the equipment in a rack shall be such that the amount of air

flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.

yMechanical Loading- Mounting of the equipment in the rack shall be such that a hazardous

condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.

yCircuit Overloading- Consideration should be given to connection of the equipment to the

supply circuit and the effect that overloading circuits may have on overcurrent protection and

supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of the equipment nameplate rating should be used

when addressing this concern.

yReliable Earthing- Reliable earthing of the rack mounting equipment should be maintained.

3-7

Rack Requirements

Before installation of SMG-3200 system in a rack, you have to prepare a rack that meets the

following requirements.

yPrepare a rack with standard electrical facilities.

yEnsure that the rack has appropriate ventilators, if it is closed type. A closed type rack should

provide at least one ventilator with fan on the side of the rack in order to circulate cool air into

the rack.

yPay attention in a closed type rack as the ventilator may cause hot air from the lower system to

rise up to the port opening of a system installed in an upper position in the rack.

yEnsure not to block up the port or fan of installed systems, if the rack is opened type.

yEnsure that the rack is equipped with an internal power bar, and is located near power supply

units.

yEnsure that the rack has ventilators on the side as well as backside for smooth air circulation.

Required Tools

yCross-shaped medium-size screwdriver

yL-shaped Bracket

yScrews

3-8 Chapter 3

Installing the System

RS-232C

LAN

MGCBLOOP

SLG

VOIP

Media Gateway

SMG-3200

E1/T1/PRI

PWR

16CH 32CHLD2 LD4 LD6LD8

4/8CH24CH LD1 LD3 LD5 LD7

L1 L2 LAN

TX LAN

OPER E1

SYNC E1

LOS

P1P3P5P7

P2P4P6P8

P1 P3P5P7

P2 P4P6 P8

P1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8

RS-232C

LAN

MGCBLOOP

SLG

VOIP

Media Gateway

SMG-3200

E1/T1/PRI

PWR

16CH32CHLD2LD4LD6LD8

4/8CH24CHLD1LD3LD5LD7

L1L2LAN

TXLAN

OPERE1

SYNCE1

LOS

P1P3P5P7

P2P4P6P8

P1P3P5P7

P2P4P6P8

P1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8

Installing in a Rack

1. Prepare two brackets and six screws.

2. Attach the brackets to each panel of the system by using the screws and fasten them on to the

SMG-3200.

3. By using 4 other screws, install the SMG-3200 unit (with brackets) in a rack.

3-9

AC 120-240V OFF(O)

ON(I)

Connecting Ground Cable

The protective earth connection to the SMG-3200 is provided via three core mains lead. The earth

wire in the mains cord (Green/Yellow) is connected in the factory to the earth terminal within the

system. The Earth wire is connected directly to the ground connection on the rear panel of the

system.

The protective earth (PE) is used for surge protection and for the electrical safety of the system.

The system must be plugged into a GPO socket that is correctly earthed. The PE provided all

system earthing requirements, a TRC is not required and should not be connected.

Before connecting ground cable, ensure that AC power supply cable is

disconnected. With power cable connected, connecting ground cable may

cause damage or possibly death.

3-10 Chapter 3

Installing the System

RS-232CLAN

MGCB LOOP

SLCVOIP

Media Gateway

SMG-3200

E1/T1/PRI

PWR

16CH 32CH LD2 LD4 LD6 LD8

4/8CH 24CH LD1 LD3 LD5 LD7

L1 L2 LAN

TX LAN

OPER E1

SYNC E1

LOS

P1 P3 P5 P7

P2 P4 P6 P8

P1 P3 P5 P7

P2 P4 P6 P8

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8

Installing Boards

Before installing or changing the various universal boards, please make sure

that the main cable is detached from power line and that all at telecommuni-

cation cables are deltached form telecommunication ports.

System Slots

MGCB board, VOIP board, and various Universal boards can be installed in the 4 slots on the

front panel of the SMG-3200. For the installation slot of each board refer to the following table.

Board

BoardBoard

Board Slot

SlotSlot

Slot

Function

FunctionFunction

Function

MGCB MGCB Controls the entire operation of the SMG-3200 system.

VOIP VOIP Provides H.323 V3-complient VoIP Gateway functions to enable

voice communication over the Internet

LOOP US1

US2 Provides the local extension trunk interface.

E&M US1

US2

Provides a 4-Wire E&M dedicated line for connection of SMG-

3200 system and PBX or KTS.

SLC US1

US2

Provides the connection between a general analog telephone and

the SMG-3200 system

MGCB Slot

VOIP Slot

US1 Slot

US2 Slot

3-11

Selecting Boards

The MGCB board and VOIP board have to be installed for system operation, whereas Universal

boards may be installed if desired. The type of Universal board used in the SMG-3200 system is

determined by the following conditions.

Tandem Gateway Mode

In case of using the SMG-3200 in tandem gateway mode, you can install following boards

according to the connection method of PBX or KTS.

NoNo

No Connection

ConnectionConnection

Connection MGCB

MGCB MGCB

MGCB Slot

SlotSlot

Slot VoIP

VoIP VoIP

VoIP Slot

SlotSlot

Slot US1

US1 US1

US1 Slot

SlotSlot

Slot US2

US2 US2

US2 Slot

SlotSlot

Slot Dial Method

Dial MethodDial Method

Dial Method

1FXS/FXO MGCB

(-)

VOIP (16 ch)

(8 ch)

SLC (8 ch)

(Incoming)

LOOP (8 ch)

(Outgoing) DTMF

2FXO MGCB

(-)

VOIP (16 ch)

(8 ch)

LOOP (8 ch)

(In/Out)

LOOP (8 ch)

(In/Out) DTMF

3E&M MGCB

(-)

VOIP (16 ch)

(8 ch) E&M (8 ch) E&M (8 ch) DTMF

PULSE

5MGCB

(E1, 30 ch)

VOIP

(32 ch) --

DTMF

R2MFC

6MGCB

(T1, 24 ch)

VOIP

(24 ch) --

DTMF

Digital

Station

Interface MGCB

(E1-PRI, 30 ch)

VOIP

(32 ch) --

In this current version, T1 type PRI is not provided.

3-12 Chapter 3

Installing the System

Standalone Gateway Mode

In case of using the SMG-3200 in standalone gateway mode, you can install only SLC board in

Universal slots.

NoNo

No MGCB

MGCB MGCB

MGCB Slot

SlotSlot

Slot VOIP

VOIP VOIP

VOIP Slot

SlotSlot

Slot US1

US1 US1

US1 Slot

SlotSlot

Slot US2

US2 US2

US2 Slot

SlotSlot

Slot Dial Method

Dial MethodDial Method

Dial Method

1 MGCB VOIP (8 ch) SLC (8 ch) - DTMF

2 MGCB VOIP (16 ch) SLC (8 ch) SLC (8 ch) DTMF

You can not install digital board (E1/PRI, T1) and analog board (LOOP, E&M) in

the slots on the system simultaneously.

Setting Jumper and Switch

Some boards have jumpers or switches to allow set according to the user’s need and system

construction. After determining the type of board and slot for installation, you have to set jumpers

and switches on the board. The following boards have to be set before installation.

☞E&M Board

☞E1/PRI, T1 Board

Other boards can be installed in a slot without jumper or switch setting. This section provides

jumper and switch setting procedures for each type of board.

E&M Board

E&M board has J1~J4/J1~J8 jumpers. The jumpers determine the kind of signaling for each port.

yTo use the TYPE I-Inverted signaling,

☞ Close pin O and G, C and B.

If the power of the connected system is not –48V, open the shunt pin of C-B.

yTo use the TYPE I-Standard signaling,

☞ Close pin O and B, C and G.

yTo use the TYPE II- Inverted signaling,

☞ Open all pins.

BOA

GNC

BOA

GNC

3-13

yTo use the TYPE II-Standard signaling,

☞ Close pin A and O.

E1/PRI, T1 Board

There are S1 and S2 switches and JP1~JP5 jumpers on the E1/PRI, T1 board. All of these switches

and jumpers are to select the kind of station line to be connected to the E1/PRI, T1 board. Prior to

the installation of the E1/PRI, T1 board onto the MGCB board, set switches and jumpers

according to following directions.

yTo connect T1

☞ Close pin #1-2 of all jumpers.

☞ Set S1 switch to ON, and set S2 switch to OFF.

yTo connect E1

☞ Close pin #2-3 of all jumpers.

☞ Set both S1 and S2 switches to ON.

yTo connect E1 type PRI

☞ Close pin #2-3 of all jumpers.

☞ Set S1 switch to OFF, and set S2 switch to ON.

Installing Daughter Boards

Daughter board is installed according to user’s need and system construction.

The following boards require daughter board installation prior to board installation.

☞MGCB Board

☞VOIP Board

Other boards can be installed in a slot without installation of a daughter board.

This section provides daughter board installation procedures for each type of board.

3-14 Chapter 3

Installing the System

RS-232C

LAN

MGCB

E1/T1/PRI

PWR

L1L2LAN

TXLAN

OPERE1

SYNCE1

LOS

MGCB Board

On the MGCB board, the R2 board or E1/PRI, T1 board can be installed.

yTo add 8 channel R2 signaling, install a R2 board.

☞ Install the R2 board.

yTo connect to E1/PRI, T1 line

☞ Install an E1/PRI, T1 board.

Installing a daughter board on the MGCB board is relatively simple. Fit the daughter board into a

Slot of the MGCB board, and firmly secure it. Slots for a R2 board and E1/PRI, T1 board

installation are as follows.

E1/PR1, T1 board R2 board

MGCB board

3-15

VOIP Board

On the VOIP board, up to 3 VOIP_Sub boards can be installed. Since each VOIP_Sub board

provides 8 VoIP channels, as a result, a maximum of 24 additional VoIP channels can be installed

on the VOIP board.

Although installing VOIP_Sub board on the VOIP board is the same as that of the MGCB board,

you have to be sure of the location of the VOIP_Sub board for installation. From the slot near the

edge connector, install VOIP_Sub boards by one by one.

yTo install 1 VOIP_Sub board

☞ Install in LOC1 slot.

yTo install 2 VOIP_Sub board

☞ Install in LOC1 and LOC2 slots.

yTo install 3 VOIP_Sub board

☞ Install in LOC1, LOC2, and LOC3 slots.

VOIP_Sub board

VOIP

LD2

LD1LD3LD5LD7

LD4LD6LD8

4/8CH24CH

16CH32CH

VOIP board

LOC1

LOC2

LOC3

3-16 Chapter 3

Installing the System

Installing Board in a Slot

Install a board in the slot of the SMG-3200 system, after procedures for daughter board installation

is completed.

When installing the board, keep the followings in mind.

yThe high voltage static-electric charge is easily accumulated in a human body. Deal with the

board after removing all the accumulated electric charge by touching any equipment’s device or

the grounded part.

yDon’t touch the Edge connector of the board and the jumper pin, if possible.

yYou have to ground the surface of a workstation, on which the board is place, after wrapping it

with conductor. And you also can put the Ground clip connected to the anti-static carrying bag

to use the station.

yWhen you have to touch the board, it is recommended to put an anti-static strap on the wrist, if

possible.

After understanding all these cautions, attach the boards on the slots in the following way

according to the system. This section describes board installation procedures in a system slot in the

case of the MGCB board. Other boards can be installed in the same method.

1. Prepare board to install, ensure there is no defect on the board, and ensure the jumper or switch

configuration is correct.

2. Referring the above directions, select a slot for board installation based on the type of board.

3-17

LOOP

SLC

VOIP

Media Gateway

SMG-3200

16CH32CHLD2LD4LD6LD8

4/8CH24CHLD1LD3LD5LD7

P1P3P5P7

P2P4P6P8

P1P3P5P7

P2P4P6P8

P1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8

RS-232C

LAN

MGCB

E1/T1/PRI

PWR

L1L2LAN

TXLAN

OPERE1

SYNCE1

LOS

LOOP

SLC

VOIP

Media Gateway

SMG-3200

16CH32CHLD2LD4LD6LD8

4/8CH24CHLD1LD3LD5LD7

P1P3P5P7

P2P4P6P8

P1P3P5P7

P2P4P6P8

P1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8

RS-232C

LAN

MGCB

E1/T1/PRI

PWR

L1L2LAN

TXLAN

OPERE1

SYNCE1

LOS

3. Carefully fit the board into the slot following the guardrails on both sides.

4. Press the center of the front panel of the board so that the board can be completely fit into the

connector on the back-plane board.

5. After ensuring that the board is connected to the back-plane board, screw down the board.

3-18 Chapter 3

Installing the System

Connecting Cables

After all necessary boards are installed in the SMG-3200 system, connect cables to the ports of the

boards to construct the VoIP network.

In this section, the Pin Numbers of the PBX or KTS port are displayed according

to the Samsung PABX INFOREX. For the case of connecting to other PBX or KTS,

connect cables referring to the Pin Name.

1. To connect the SMG-3200 and PBX or KTS with general trunk, connect one end of a RJ-11

cable to the SLC port of the SMG-3200, and the other end to the LOOP port of the PBX or

KTS.

SLC port of SMG-3200

SLC port of SMG-3200SLC port of SMG-3200

SLC port of SMG-3200 LOOP

LOOPLOOP

LOOP port of PBX or KTS

port of PBX or KTS port of PBX or KTS

port of PBX or KTS

Pin Name Name Pin

3TipTip 0 1

4RingRing 0 26

2. To connect the SMG-3200 and PBX or KTS with SLC line, connect one end of a RJ-11 cable

to the LOOP port of the SMG-3200, and the other end to the SLC port of the PBX or KTS.

LOOP port of SMG-3200

LOOP port of SMG-3200LOOP port of SMG-3200

LOOP port of SMG-3200 SLC

SLCSLC

SLC port of PBX or KTS

port of PBX or KTS port of PBX or KTS

port of PBX or KTS

Pin Name Name Pin

3TipTip 0 1

4RingRing 0 26

3-19

3. To connect the SMG-3200 and PBX or KTS with E&M line, connect one end of a RJ-11 cable

to the E&M port of the SMG-3200, and the other end to the E&M port of the PBX or KTS. At

this time, connect E line of one and M line of the other, and connect M line of one and E line of

the other.

E&M port of SMG-3200

E&M port of SMG-3200E&M port of SMG-3200

E&M port of SMG-3200 E&M port of

E&M port of E&M port of

E&M port of PBX or KTS

PBX or KTSPBX or KTS

PBX or KTS

Pin Name Name Pin

1M E 3

2TxTRxT 1

3RxTTxT 2

4RxRTxR 27

5TxRRxR 26

6E M 28

4. To connect the SMG-3200 and PBX or KTS with E1/PRI, T1 line, connect one end of a RJ-11

cable to the E1/PRI, T1 port of the SMG-3200, and the other end to the E1/PRI, T1 port of the

PBX or KTS.

E1/PRI, T1 port of SMG-3200

E1/PRI, T1 port of SMG-3200E1/PRI, T1 port of SMG-3200

E1/PRI, T1 port of SMG-3200 E1/PRI, T1 port of

E1/PRI, T1 port of E1/PRI, T1 port of

E1/PRI, T1 port of PBX or KTS

PBX or KTSPBX or KTS

PBX or KTS

Pin Name Name Pin

1Tx+Rx+ 2

2Tx-Rx- 27

4Rx+Tx+ 1

5Rx-Tx- 26

3-20 Chapter 3

Installing the System

5. To connect the SMG-3200 and analog terminal such as analog telephone or FAX machine,

connect one end of RJ-11 cable to SLC port of the SMG-3200, and the other end to the port of

analog terminal.

SLC port of SMG-3200

SLC port of SMG-3200SLC port of SMG-3200

SLC port of SMG-3200

Pin Name

3Tip

4Ring

6. Connect the SMG-3200 to the network of the site. Connect one end of a RJ-45 cable (Twisted

pair category-5 straight-through) to the LAN port of the SMG-3200, and the other end of the

cable to the Ethernet port of the hub or switch.

LAN port of SMG-3200

LAN port of SMG-3200LAN port of SMG-3200

LAN port of SMG-3200 Ethernet port of switch

Ethernet port of switchEthernet port of switch

Ethernet port of switch

Pin Name Name Pin

1Tx+Rx+ 1

2Tx-Rx- 2

3Rx+Tx+ 3

6Rx-Tx- 6

7. Connect console terminal. Connect one end of a serial cable to the RS-232C port of the

SMG-3200, and the other end of the cable to the serial port of a PC.

RS-232C port of SMG-3200

RS-232C port of SMG-3200RS-232C port of SMG-3200

RS-232C port of SMG-3200 9 Pin

9 Pin 9 Pin

9 Pin Serial port of PC

Serial port of PCSerial port of PC

Serial port of PC

Pin Name Name Pin

2TxRx 2

3RxTx 3

5 GND GND 5

3-21

AC 120-240V OFF(O)

ON(I)

Attaching Ferrite Cores

In order to reduce an electromagnetic waves emission, attach ferrite cores to the cable which it

connects to the E1/PRI, T1 pot and the LAN pot.

When attaching ferrite cores, the cables after two wheel turnings with a ferrite core outer side,

press the locks consecutively until the lock fasten securely.

Connecting Power Cable

Before connecting the power cable to the SMG-3200, you have to be aware of the following

guidelines.

yDo not connect other equipment to the AC outlet connected to the system to avoid

malfunction or fire of the system due to electrical noise and low voltage.

yThe AC power source to supply power must be stable and uninterruptible, since power

outages during the night can cause malfunctioning of the system.

After checking the above guidelines, connect the power cable to the system as follows.

1. There is a power connector on the rear side of the SMG-3200.

2. Connect grounded outlet and the power connector on the rear side of the system with the power

cable.

4-1

Chapter 4 Configuring the System

This chapter describes procedures for the configuration of the SMG-3200 operating environment

with console terminal as well as the login procedure in console terminal.

Setting up the Terminal

Terminal setup methods differ according to terminal types and operating system. In this manual,

we will using an example of how to use the hyper terminal on a PC running with a Windows 98

operation system.

Terminal Features

The user can connect an ASCII terminal such as a VT100 or VT220 or a PC installed with a

terminal emulation program.

y Emulation VT100/ANSI Compatible

y Bits per second 38400

y Data bit 8

y Parity None

y Stop bit 1

y Flow control Xon/Xoff

Setting up the Terminal

To set up a terminal, follow these steps.

1. Turn on the PC and boot with Windows98.

2. Click [Start] at the bottom and select Programs and select Program Î Accessories Î

Communication Î HyperTerminal.

3. When the <HyperTerminal> window appears, double-click the Hypertrm icon.

4. When the <Connection Description> window appears, type the name of a hyper terminal in the

Name box and select an icon displayed in the Icon box. Then, click [OK].

4-2 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

5. Then, the user will have the following <Phone Number> window appears, where the user can

define a location to connect the hyper terminal. Since the terminal is directly connected to the

SMG-3200 through a COM port, click the Connect using box and select a corresponding

COM port.

6. Next, the user will the <COMx Properties> window appears, where the user can configure

various options for the selected COM port. Configure each item as shown in the following and

click [OK].

7. Next, a new hyper terminal where the user can set up the SMG-3200 by using console

commands will pop up.

4-3

AC 120-240V OFF(O)

ON(I)

OFF(O)

ON(I)

Starting SMG-3200

This section describes the login procedure using CLI, after turning on SMG-3200.

Turning on

While the hyper terminal window is on the screen, turn on the SMG-3200 with the power button in

the rear of the system.

After the system turn on, system initialization proceeds approximately 60 seconds. The system

POST (Power On Self Test) will be executed and the factory-preset configuration data will be

loaded and shown on the terminal.

If booting of the SMG-3200 is successfully completed, then

yOn the MGCB board,

☞ L2 LED and PWR LED are on in green.

☞ OPER LED blinks in green.

yOn the VOIP board,

☞ 8CH LED is on in green

☞ LD1 LED blinks in green.

4-4 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

Logging in

1. After the SMG-3200 boots up, the login prompt will show the following.

SMG3200 Login:

2. Type ‘smg3200’ at the login prompt and press [Enter].

SMG3200 Login: smg3200

3. Type password at ‘Password:’ and press [Enter]. When logging in for the very first time, enter

‘smg3200v1’. For the security purposes, the password will be not displayed on the terminal.

SMG3200 Login:smg3200

Password:smg3200v1

4. When the user successfully logs in, the following main screen will be displayed.

SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS Welcome to

SSS SS SSSS SSSSSS SSS

SS SSSSSSSSS S SSS SSSS SSSSSSSS SSSSS SSSSS SSSS SSSS

SSS SSSSSSSS SS S S SSS SSSSSSSSS SS SS SS SS SS SS

SSSSS SSSSSS SSS SS SS SSSS SS SS SS SS SS SS SS

SSSSSSS SSSS SSSSSSS SSS SSSS SSS SS SS SS SS SS SS

SSSSSSSS SSS SSSSSSS SSSS SSS SSS SS SS SS SS SS SS

SS SSS SSSSSSS SSSSS SS SSSSS SSSSS SSSS SSSS

SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS System

SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS Login Name: smg3200

SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS Program Version: 3200V2.2 :020307

SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS Copyright Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.

help Print This List

sysmenu System Configuration

pstnmenu PSTN Configuration

voipmenu VoIP Configuration

clicmd List Of CLI Command

quit Logout

value = 1 = 0x1

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

4-5

5. Press [Enter] to display the SMG3200 login prompt.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

4-6 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

Configuring the Operating Environment

To operate the SMG-3200, only the fundamental information configuration is required, and the

detailed operation environment configuration is configured automatically by using default values.

The following 3 configurations are necessary for the operation of the SMG-3200. Other than these

configurations, additional operation environment configurations are not normally used.

☞TCP/IP Configuration : IP address, subnet mask, default gateway

☞System Operation Mode : Gateway operation mode, PCM type

☞VoIP Configuration : VoIP table/gatekeeper configuration

This section describes how to configure the operating environment after turning on and logging in

the SMG-3200.

Messages displayed in the console terminal emulator in this section may differ

according to the version of system software, and might be different from the

actual messages you can see on the console terminal.

During operation environment configuration, pressing [Enter] without input

value in conversational mode is the same as configuration with the default

value at the current step.

Configuring the TCP/IP

To use the TCP/IP protocol for Internet connection, you must configure network information such

as IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

SMG-3200 provides the following two methods for TCP/IP configuration.

❶Automatic Configuration

Configures TCP/IP information automatically using a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration

Protocol) server.

4-7

❷Manual Configuration

Specify the static IP address, subnet mask and default gateway of the SMG-3200.

Before configuring TCP/IP, determine whether automatically configure TCP/IP information or not.

yAutomatic configuration requires DHCP service provided by a DHCP server.

yIn case automatic configuration is not available, you have to know the following information

for manual configuration of TCP/IP settings.

- IP address and subnet mask for the SMG-3200

- IP address of default gateway

Option ❶

❶❶

❶ Automatic Configuration

To set up TCP/IP information automatically using a DHCP server, configure the SMG-3200 as a

DHCP client using the following directions.

1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type ‘sysmenu’ and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> sysmenu

2. <System Configuration Menu> screen is displayed. Type ‘0’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< System Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] DHCP Client Setting

[1] Network Configuration

[2] Login ID Configuration

[3] System Upgrade

[4] Display System Version

[5] Default DB Setting

[6] Restart System

[7] Exit

Select ? 0

4-8 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

3. <DHCP Client Setting> screen is displayed. Enter the value as the following indication.

<<<<< DHCP Client Setting >>>>>

+----+---------------------+--------------------------+

| No | Items | Value |

+----+---------------------+--------------------------+

| 0 | DHCP Client Set | OFF |

| 1 | Class ID | |

+----+---------------------+--------------------------+

[ - :Null, . :Exit ]

Configuration Item Number:0

*Input

‘

’

Set DHCP Client? (y: ON, n: OFF): ON -> y

*Input

‘

’

to set the status of the DHCP Client On.

Good

Configuration Item Number: .

*Input

‘

’

to exit the configuration.

#System Configuration has changed. Restart? (y: Now, n: Later) -> y

*Input

‘

’

to reboot the system.

4. Log in again on CLI after the system is restarted.

Option ❷

❷❷

❷ Manual Configuration

Referring to the following directions, specify static IP address, subnet mask, and IP address of

default gateway for the SMG-3200.

1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type ‘sysmenu’ and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> sysmenu

4-9

2. <System Configuration Menu> screen is displayed. Type ‘1’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< System Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] DHCP Client Setting

[1] Network Configuration

[2] Login ID Configuration

[3] System Upgrade

[4] Display System Version

[5] Default DB Setting

[6] Restart System

[7] Exit

Select ? 1

3. <Network Configuration> screen is displayed. Type ‘y’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< Network Configuration >>>>

+---+----------------------+-----------------------------+

| No | Items | Value |

+---+----------------------+-----------------------------+

| 0 | IP Address | 165.213.81.230 |

| 1 | Gateway Address | 165.213.81.1 |

| 2 | Netmask | 255.255.255.0 |

| 3 | TOS(Type Of Service) | 0x0 |

| 4 | MAC Address(Read Only) | SAMSUNG(00-00-F0)-AB-CD-0D |

+---+----------------------+-----------------------------+

[ . :Exit ]

Change Network Configuration? (y: Yes, n: No) ->

4. The following message is displayed. Input the IP address of the SMG-3200 and press [Enter].

IP Address (dot form): 165.213.81.230 -> 165.213.81.230

4-10 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

5. Input the IP address of default gateway and press [Enter].

Gateway Address (dot form): 165.213.81.1 -> 165.213.81.1

6. Input the subnet mask for the IP address of the SMG-3200 and press [Enter].

Netmask(dot form): 255.255.255.0 -> 255.255.255.0

7. TOS (Type Of Service) value is used to determine the priority of voice packets transmitted

from the SMG-3200 on the network, which enables the network to provide better QOS

(Quality Of Service). Input appropriate TOS value and press [Enter].

+---------------------------------------------------+

| TOS(Type Of Service) Field |

+---------------------------------------------------+

|7 | 6 | 5 | 4| 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |

+---------------------------------------------------+

| Priority | D | T | R | 0 | 0 |

+---------------------------------------------------+

D: if 0x10, Minimum Delay

T: if 0x08, Maximum Throughput

R: if 0x04, Maximum Reliability

Range:0x00 ~ 0xFF, Default:0x00

TOS Value (Default: 0x00): 0x00 -> 0

Consult with your network administrator about TOS configuration. To make

TOS configuration effective, network routing equipment connected to the

SMG-3200 have to be configured to support TOS in advance. You can

configure TOS values, if necessary, regardless of DHCP server.

4-11

8. Configured network parameters and message asking you whether to restart system is displayed

as follows. After confirming the parameters type ‘y’ and press [Enter].

Good

>>> IP Address = 165.213.81.230

>>> Gateway = 165.213.81.1

>>> Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0

>>> TOS = 0

# System Configuration has changed. Restart? (y: Now, n: Later) -> y

9. Log in again on CLI after the system is restarted.

Configuring the System Operation Mode

You have to configure gateway operation mode and PCM type, after TCP/IP configuration.

This section describes procedures for system operation configuration.

Setting up Gateway Operation Mode

SMG-3200 gateway operates in either of the following 2 operation modes.

☞Tandem Gateway : SMG-3200 communicates with PBX or KTS over PSTN trunk without

subscriber phone connection.

☞Standalone Gateway : SMG-3200 communicates with analog telephone with PSTN trunk

with subscriber phone connection through SLC port.

Configure gateway operation mode of SMG-3200 referring to the following directions.

4-12 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type ‘pstnmenu’ and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> pstnmenu

2. <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen is displayed. Type ‘0’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLC Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 0

4-13

3. To configure the gateway operation mode of the SMG-3200, type ‘0’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< Gateway Operation Mode >>>>>

+----+-----------------------+----------------+-------------+

+----+-----------------------+----------------+-------------+

+----+-----------------------+----------------+-------------+

<<<<< PSTN Inbound LCR Table >>>>>

+----+-----------+-----------++---+-------------+-----------+

| No | Inbound Prefix | Max Digit || No | Inbound Prefix | Max Digit |

| | | Count || | | Count |

+----+-----------+-----------++---+-------------+-----------+

| 2 | | 0 || 18 | | 0 |

| 3 | | 0 || 19 | | 0 |

| 4 | | 0 || 20 | | 0 |

| 5 | | 0 || 21 | | 0 |

| 6 | | 0 || 22 | | 0 |

| 7 | | 0 || 23 | | 0 |

| 8 | | 0 || 24 | | 0 |

| 9 | | 0 || 25 | | 0 |

| 10 | | 0 || 26 | | 0 |

| 11 | | 0 || 27 | | 0 |

| 12 | | 0 || 28 | | 0 |

| 13 | | 0 || 29 | | 0 |

| 14 | | 0 || 30 | | 0 |

| 15 | | 0 || 31 | | 0 |

| 16 | | 0 || 32 | | 0 |

| 17 | | 0 || 33 | | 0 |

+----+-----------+-----------++---+-------------+-----------+

[ . :Exit, - :Null, Enter :Skip ]

Configuration Item Number: 0

4. Type the number of desired gateway operation mode and press [Enter].

Gateway Operation Mode (0:Tandem Gateway, 1:Standalone): Standalone -> 0

5. To close current screen, type ‘.’ and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: .

4-14 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

6. Return to the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen.

Setting up PCM Type

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) is the most frequently used analog-to-digital encoding (A/D

conversion technique to convert analog voice into digital signal). SMG-3200 provides 2 PCM

types, which are A-law and U-law.

☞A-law : A-law is an ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union) standard for analog-to-

digital conversion in PCM. A-law is used in most of the telephone networks in

Europe, and similar to U-law used in North America.

☞μ-law : μ-law is an ITU-T (International Telecommunications Union)standard for analog-

to-digital conversion in PCM. μ-law is used in most of the telephone networks in

North America.

SMG-3200 provides A-law type by default. To use μ-law type, trunk board

and station board such as LOOP, SLC, E&M need to be changed.

Setting up the PCM type of the SMG-3200 using the following directions.

4-15

1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘2’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLC Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 2

2. <PCM Method> screen is displayed. Type ‘0’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< PCM Method >>>>>

+---+-------------------------+----------------+------------+

+---+-------------------------+----------------+------------+

+---+-------------------------+----------------+------------+

[ . :Exit ]

Configuration Item Number:

4-16 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

3. Input the number of desired PCM type and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: 0

PCM Type (0:U_LAW, 1:A_LAW): A_LAW -> 1

4. To close current screen, type ‘.’ and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: .

5. After returning to the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘16’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLC Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 16

6. Message asking if you want to save the changed configuration in flash memory is displayed.

Type ‘y’ and press [Enter].

# PSTN Configuration has changed. Save? (y: Yes, n: No) -> y

7. Changed data is saved in flash memory, and you are returned to the initial screen of the

SMG-3200 CLI interface.

4-17

Configuring the VoIP

This section describes the procedures for the SMG-3200 VoIP configuration. The SMG-3200 VoIP

configuration procedure is determined by the Gatekeeper service that translates terminal aliases

such as telephone number in E.164 format, e-mail address, and H.323 ID into an IP address.

❶When not using Gatekeeper

You have to create the VoIP table. To create the VoIP table, consult with the network

administrator for required information.

❷When using Gatekeeper

yIP address and Alias (host name) of Gatekeeper

yH.323 ID and E.164 ID of the SMG-3200 to be registered in Gatekeeper

Option ❶

❶❶

❶ When not using Gatekeeper

Create the VoIP table according to the following directions.

1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type ‘voipmenu’ and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> voipmenu

2. <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen is displayed. Type ‘5’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] VoIP General Option

[1] VoIP DSP Option

[2] VoIP Gatekeeper Option

[3] VoIP Routing Table

[4] VoIP Caller ID Table

[5] VoIP Remote IP Table

[6] VoIP Remote IP Status

[7] Save & Exit

[8] Exit

Select ? 5

4-18 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

3. Message as follows is displayed. Type ‘0’ and press [Enter].

IP Table Index Number(Range: 0 ~ 31): 0

4. <VoIP Remote IP Table> screen is displayed. Type the number of the VoIP table to configure

and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP Remote IP Table >>>>>

+-----+--------------------+-----+--------------------+

| No | IP Address | No | IP Address |

+-----+--------------------+-----+--------------------+

| 0 | 168.213.81. 230 | 16 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 1 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 17 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 2 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 18 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 3 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 19 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 4 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 20 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 5 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 21 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 6 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 22 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 7 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 23 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 8 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 24 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 9 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 25 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 10 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 26 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 11 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 27 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 12 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 28 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 13 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 29 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 14 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 30 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 15 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 31 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

+-----+--------------------+-----+--------------------+

[ . :Exit ]

Configuration Item Number:

5. Input IP address of opposite VoIP equipment to be connected to the SMG-3200 and press

[Enter].

IP Address (dot form): 0.0.0.0 ->

6. To register the IP address of other VoIP equipment, repeat steps 4 ~ 5.

4-19

7. After VoIP table creation is completed, type ‘.’ and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: .

8. To close current screen, type ‘.’ and press [Enter].

IP Table Index Number(Range: 0 ~ 31): .

9. After returning to the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen. Type ‘8’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] VoIP General Option

[1] VoIP DSP Option

[2] VoIP Gatekeeper Option

[3] VoIP Routing Table

[4] VoIP Caller ID Table

[5] VoIP Remote IP Table

[6] VoIP Remote IP Status

[7] Save & Exit

[8] Exit

Select ? 8

10. Message asking if you want to save the changed configuration in flash memory is displayed.

Type ‘y’ and press [Enter].

# VoIP Configuration has changed. Save? (y: Yes, n: No) -> y

11. Changed data is saved in flash memory.

4-20 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

Option ❷

❷❷

❷ When using Gatekeeper

Configure Gatekeeper information according to the following directions.

1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type ‘voipmenu’ and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> voipmenu

2. <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen is displayed. Type ‘2’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] VoIP General Option

[1] VoIP DSP Option

[2] VoIP Gatekeeper Option

[3] VoIP Routing Table

[4] VoIP Caller ID Table

[5] VoIP Remote IP Table

[6] VoIP Remote IP Status

[7] Save & Exit

[8] Exit

Select ? 2

4-21

3. <VoIP Gatekeeper Option> screen is displayed. Type ‘0’ and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP Gatekeeper Option >>>>>

+--+--------------------+-------------------+---------------+

+--+--------------------+-------------------+---------------+

| 5 | Gatekeeper IP | 0.0.0.0 | .. |

| 6 | Gatekeeper Alias | Gatekeeper | .. |

| 7 | Alternative Gatekeeper IP | 0.0.0.0 | .. |

| 9 | Gateway Name| H.323 ID | SMG3200 | .. |

| 10 | E.164 | 3200 | .. |

+--+--------------------+-------------------+---------------+

[ . :Exit, - :Null ]

Configuration Item Number:

4. Message is displayed as follows. Type ‘1’ and press [Enter].

Gatekeeper Connection (0:Disable, 1:Enable): Disable -> 1

5. To specify IP address of Gatekeeper, type ‘5’ and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: 5

6. Input IP address of Gatekeeper and press [Enter].

Gatekeeper IP Address (dot form): 165.213.81.230 -> 165.213.81.58

7. To specify alias name (host name) of Gatekeeper, type ‘6’ and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: 6

4-22 Chapter 4

Configuring the System

8. Input alias name (host name) of gatekeeper and press [Enter].

Gatekeeper Alias Name : Gatekeeper -> Gatekeeper1

9. To specify H.323 ID of the SMG-3200, type ‘9’ and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: 9

10. Input H.323 ID of the SMG-3200 for login and press [Enter].

Gateway Name H.323 ID : pa-37 -> pa-27

11. To close the current screen, type ‘.’ and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: .

12. After returning to the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘8’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] VoIP General Option

[1] VoIP DSP Option

[2] VoIP Gatekeeper Option

[3] VoIP Routing Table

[4] VoIP Caller ID Table

[5] VoIP Remote IP Table

[6] VoIP Remote IP Status

[7] Save & Exit

[8] Exit

Select ? 8

13. Message asking if you want to save the changed configuration in flash memory is displayed.

Type ‘y’ and press [Enter].

# VoIP Configuration has changed. Save? (y: Yes, n: No) -> y

14. Changed data is saved in flash memory.

5-1

Chapter 5 CLI (Command Line Interface)

This chapter presents the CLI that allows operational configuration of the SMG-3200. An

overview of menus followed by a description of functions for each menu and settings for

submenus is given.

Menu Configuration

The CLI menu of the SMG-3200 consists of 6 main menus. Each menu has a number of submenus,

except for ‘help’ and ‘quit’ menus.

Main Menu

Main MenuMain Menu

Main Menu Sub Menu

Sub MenuSub Menu

Sub Menu

help No

sysmenu [0] DHCP Client Setting

[1]Network Configuration

[2]Login ID Configuration

[3] System Upgrade

[4] Display Package Information

[5] Default DB Setting

[6] Restart System

[7] Exit

pstnmenu [0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLC Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

VoIP menu [0]VoIP General Option

[1]VoIP DSP Option

[2]VoIP Gatekeeper Option

5-2 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[3]VoIP Routing Table

[4]VoIP Caller ID Table

[5]VoIP Remote IP Table

[6]VoIP Remote IP Status

[7] Save & Exit

[8] Exit

clicmd clicmd

cdrhelp

date

dbfilehelp

optionhelp

settime

quit No

5-3

Using Menus

Make sure that you familiarize yourself with the following instructions on the CLI Menus of the

SMG-3200.

ySelecting the Main Menu

To select the Main Menu from prompt on the SMG-3200 main screen, type in the name of the

desired menu. For example, type ‘sysmenu’ and press [Enter] to select sysmenu.

ySelecting a Submenu

To select a submenu, type the number of the desired submenu. For example, type ‘0’ and press

[Enter] to select 0) DHCP Client Setting on the System Configuration Menu.

When you using the ‘clicmd’ menu, just input the string of submenu name at the

SMG3200:xxxx.xxx.xx.xxx> prompt in the main screen. Each submenu itself can be CLI command,

or has another submenu.

yBack to the Previous Screen

To close the current menu screen and return to the previous screen, type in the number

corresponding to Exit in the menu.

In addition to the above, you can follow the guide that appears on the bottom of the screen every

time you select a menu.

Each menu item will be explained in detail in the following sections.

5-4 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

System Configuration Menu

You can set overall system functions, such as IP address and login password, of the SMG-3200

from the System Configuration Menu. You can also view values of parameters such as system

version information.

The following <System Configuration Menu> screen will appear when you type ‘sysmenu’ and

press [Enter] from the prompt on the main screen.

<<<<< System Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] DHCP Client Setting

[1] Network Configuration

[2] Login ID Configuration

[3] System Upgrade

[4] Display Package Information

[5] Default DB Setting

[6] Restart System

[7] Exit

Select ?

The following table shows an overview of the 8 submenus found in the System Configuration

Menu.

NoNo

No Menu

MenuMenu

Menu Functions

FunctionsFunctions

Functions

0 DHCP Client Setting Sets the SMG-3200 as a DHCP client.

1 Network Configuration Configures static IP address, subnet mask and

gateway.

2 Login ID Configuration Configures login name and password.

3 System Upgrade Upgrades the system software.

4 Display Package Information Displays the version of system program.

5 Default DB Setting Resets item values by type of database with default

values.

6 Restart System Restarts the system.

7Exit Closes the System Configuration Menu screen.

5-5

[0] DHCP Client Setting

Function You can set the SMG-3200 as a DHCP client. By doing so, the DHCP server

automatically allocates an IP address for the SMG-3200. After the setup, you must

restart the system to implement the change.

Default

DHCP Client Set OFF

Value Class ID (none)

Procedure 1. In the <System Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘0’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< DHCP Client Setting >>>>>

+----+---------------------+----------------+

| No | Items | Value |

+--------------------------+----------------+

| 0 | DHCP Client Set | OFF |

| 1 | Class ID | |

+----+---------------------+----------------+

[- :Null, . :Exit ]

2. To set the SMG-3200 as a DHCP client, select 0 in Configuration Item

Number, press [Enter], and type ‘y’.

Set DHCP Client? (y: ON, n: OFF): ON ->

3. When Class ID is needed, select 1 in Configuration Item Number, press [Enter],

and type ‘y’. Enter Class ID if it is necessary in DHCP server.

4. A message asking whether to restart the system will be displayed. To restart

immediately, type ‘y’ or type ‘n’ otherwise and press [Enter].

# System Configuration has changed. Restart? (y: Now, n: Later) ->

5-6 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[1] Network Configuration

Function Users can set the network configuration such as IP address for the SMG-3200,

default gateway address and subnet mask. After setup, you must restart the system

to implement the change.

Procedure 1. In the <System Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘1’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Network Configuration >>>>

+---+-------------------+-----------------------+

| No| Items | Value |

+-----------------------+-----------------------+

| 0 | IP Address | 165.213.81.230 |

| 1 | Gateway Address | 165.213.81.1 |

| 2 | Netmask | 255.255.255.0 |

| 3 | TOS(Type Of Service) | 0x0 |

| 4 | MAC Address(Read Only) | SAMSUNG(00-00-F0)-AB-CD-0D |

+---+-------------------+-----------------------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. To change the network information, type ‘y’, and press [Enter].

Change Network Configuration? (y: Yes, n: No) ->

3. Input a new IP address for the SMG-3200 and press [Enter].

IP Address (dot form): 165.213.81.230 ->

4. Input an IP address for the default gateway and press [Enter].

Gateway Address (dot form): 165.213.81.1 ->

5. Input a subnet mask and press [Enter].

Netmask(dot form): 255.255.255.0 ->

5-7

6. Set a TOS value in consultation with your network administrator at the site.

TOS (Type Of Service) requests a router for a specific service to effectively

process voice packets (that are transmitted from the SMG-3200) on the

network. Refer to the definition of terms listed in the Appendix D for a full

description of TOS.

+-------------------------------+

| TOS(Type Of Service) Field |

+-------------------------------+

| 7 | 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 | 0 |

+-------------------------------+

| Priority | D | T | R | 0 | 0 |

+-------------------------------+

D: if 0x10, Minimum Delay

T: if 0x08, Maximum Throughput

R: if 0x04, Maximum Reliability

Range:0x00 ~ 0xFF, Default:0x00

TOS Value (Default: 0x00): 0x00 ->

When you set TOS for the SMG-3200, you must set router to

support the TOS. You can configure TOS values, if necessary,

to process QoS (Quality of Service) regardless of whether

using a DHCP server or not.

7. A message asking whether to restart the system will be displayed as follows.

To restart immediately, type ‘y’ or type ‘n’ otherwise and press [Enter].

# System Configuration has changed. Restart? (y: Now, n: Later) ->

MAC Address

MAC Address is a fixed address that is allocated to a network

controller of the SMG-3200. It cannot be modified by users.

5-8 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[2] Login ID Configuration

Function You can change the login name and password of CLI.

Default Login Name smg3200

Value Login Passwd smg3200v1

Procedure 1. In the <System Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘2’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Login ID Configuration >>>>>

+----+---------------------+------------------+

| No | Items | Value |

+----+---------------------+------------------+

| 0 | Login Name | smg3200 |

| 1 | Login Passwd | smg3200v1 |

+----+---------------------+------------------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. To change the login name and password of CLI, type ‘y’, and press [Enter].

Change Login Name and Passwd? (y: Yes, n: No) ->

3. Input a new login name and press [Enter]. The new login name must be

different from the default or previous login names.

Enter New Login Name: smg3200 ->

4. Input a new password.

Enter New Passwd: smg3200v1 ->

5. A message asking whether to restart the system will be displayed as follows.

To restart immediately, type ‘y’ or type ‘n’ otherwise and press [Enter].

# System Configuration has changed. Restart? (y: Now, n: Later) ->

5-9

[3] System Upgrade

Function You can view the system upgrade information, or change the program of the DSP

chip for VoIP and the operation program for the SMG-3200 using TFTP or FTP.

Changes are stored in the system’s flash memory and will be implemented when

the system is rebooted.

There are two ways to upgrade the system of the SMG-3200:

❶ TFTP : It receives the system program stored on a TFTP server at a remote

location through TFTP protocol and changes the program. The system

program to be changed must be stored under the “/tftpboot” directory

in the TFTP server.

❷ FTP : When there is no TFTP server, it first receives the program to be

changed through FTP protocol. By selecting the FTP method and

typing in the number of files in the system program, the system

program will be changed.

Procedure 1. In the <System Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘3’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< System Upgrade >>>>

[TFTP Method]

+---+----------------------------+---------------+

| NO | Items | Value |

+---+----------------------------+---------------+

| 0 | TFTP Server Address | 165.213.81.10 |

| 1 | Upgrade Status | SUCCESS |

| 2 | Working Program Version | 3200V2.2:020307 |

| 3 | Saved Program Version | 3200V2.2:020307 |

| 4 | Total Program File Count | 30 |

| 5 | Saved Program File Count | 30 |

| 6 | DSP Package File Count | 2 |

| 7 | Main Package File Count | 28 |

+---+----------------------------+---------------+

[FTP Method]

+---+----------------------------+---------------+

| No | Items | Value |

+---+----------------------------+---------------+

| 0 | DSP Package File Count | 2 |

| | Main Package File Count | 28 |

+---+----------------------------+---------------+

[ . :Exit ]

5-10 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

2. To upgrade the system software, type ‘y’, and press [Enter].

Upgrade This System? (y: Yes, n: No) -> y

3. Select an upgrade method and press [Enter].

Upgrade Method (1: TFTP, 2: FTP) ->

4. When TFTP is selected, input the IP address of the TFTP server. When FTP is

selected.

TFTP Server Address (dot form): 165.213.81.10 ->

5. Input the number of files in the DSP Chip program for VoIP. When none of the

DSP Chip programs for VoIP are to be upgraded, type ‘0’ and press [Enter].

DSP Package File Count: 2 ->

6. Input the number of system operation program files. When none of the system

operation programs are to be upgraded, type ‘0’ and press [Enter].

Main Package File Count: 28 ->

7. A message asking you whether to restart the system will be displayed as

follows. To restart immediately, type ‘y’ or type ‘n’ otherwise and press

[Enter].

# System Configuration has changed. Restart? (y: Now, n: Later) ->

The number of DSP files or system operation files can be

changed according to the version of system program.

5-11

[4] Display Package Information

Function You can view the version information of the program that is installed in the

system.

Procedure 1. In the <System Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘4’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Display Package Information >>>>

+---+----------------------------+----------------+

| No | Items | Value |

+---+----------------------------+----------------+

| 0 | Boot ROM Version | BootROM ver 1.1 |

| 1 | Working Program Version | 3200V2.2:020307 |

| 2 | Saved Program Versio | 3200V2.2:020307 |

| 3 | Total Program File Count | 30 |

| 4 | Saved Program File Count | 30 |

| 5 | Upgrade Status | SUCCESS |

| 6 | EMS | Disabled |

+---+----------------------------+----------------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. The following information will appear.

yBoot ROM Version : Version of the Boot ROM.

yWorking Program Version : Version of the program currently in operation.

ySaved Program Version : Version of the program stored in flash memory.

yTotal Program File Count : Number of program files.

ySaved Program File Count : Number of program files stored in flash

memory.

yUpgrade Status : Status of the latest upgraded system program.

yEMS: Indicates whether EMS (Element Management System), the GUI

maintenance tool for the SMG-3200, is enabled.

5-12 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[5] Default DB Setting

Function You can set all values of each variable in the SMG-3200 to default values, by

database type.

Procedure 1. In the <System Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘5’, and press [Enter].

2. When the following message appears, select which database variables are to be

changed to default values and press [Enter]. To change all database variable

values with default values, select ‘0’.

Set Default DB (0: All, 1: System, 2: PSTN, 3: VoIP )

3. It will automatically find and set the old values to the default values. The

screen below the case you selected ALL.

>>> Set Default System DB(Default Login ID):

Good

>>> Set Default System DB(Default Password):

Good

>>> Set Default System DB(DHCP Client Off ):

Good

>>> Set Default PSTN DB(PSTN Configuration):

Good

>>> Set Default VoIP DB(VoIP Configuration):

Good

4. Upon completion, a message asking whether to restart the system will be

displayed as follows. To restart immediately, type ‘y’ or type ‘n’ otherwise and

press [Enter].

# System Configuration has changed. Restart? (y: Now, n: Later) ->

5-13

[6] Restart System

Function When you execute the system restart command the system will restart provided

that the value of Upgrade Status on the 4) Display Package Information menu

is ‘SUCCESS’. If the value is ‘Fail’ or ‘Loading’, the system will not restart and a

warning message will appear. This is because the system will not operate properly

when the restart command is given when the system update has not been properly

completed.

Procedure 1. In the <System Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘6’, and press [Enter].

Restart System? (y: Yes, n: No)

2. To restart the system, type ‘y’, and press [Enter].

[7] Exit

Function This closes the <System Configuration Menu> screen and returns to the main

menu screen.

Procedure In the <System Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘7’ and press [Enter].

5-14 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

PSTN Configuration Menu

In the PSTN Configuration Menu, you can set the PSTN interface that is required to connect to

the PSTN trunk line. You can also view the values of parameters.

At the SMG-3200 prompt of the main screen, type ‘pstnmenu’ and press [Enter]. The following

PSTN Configuration Menu screen will be displayed.

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLC Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ?

5-15

The following is an overview of the 17 submenus found in the PSTN Configuration Menu.

NoNo

No Menu

MenuMenu

Menu Functions

FunctionsFunctions

Functions

0 Gateway Operation Mode Sets the system operation mode.

1 PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit When PSTN routing, it configures a trunk line access

code used in either PBX or KTS.

2 PCM Method Sets PCM mode.

3 Dial Method Sets the trunk line digit transmission method.

4SLC Signal Sets the signal type of analog interface.

5 Trunk Signal Sets the signal type of digital interface.

6 Call Control Method Sets the signal type for call control.

7 Ring Cadence Sets the system ring cadence.

8 System Tone Cadence Sets the system tone cadence.

9 CO Tone Cadence Sets the CO tone cadence.

10 Gain Control Adjusts call quality depending on the connection type.

11 Diagnosis Sets the diagnosis interval for PSTN interface.

12 MMC Port Block/UnBlock Specifies use of a specific port.

13 Display Slot Configuration Views configuration of cards installed in system slots.

14 Display Port Status Views system slots and operation status of ports.

15 Save & Exit Closes the PSTN Configuration Menu screen with saving

changes.

16 Exit Closes the PSTN Configuration Menu screen without

saving changes.

5-16 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

Function (1) Gateway Operation Mode

The SMG-3200 operates in either of the following modes. In this menu you can

configure the operation mode of the SMG-3200.

- Tandem Gateway : You can connect the SMG-3200 to PBX or KTS, and use the

system as a gateway without internal subscribers.

- Standalone Gateway : You can connect a telephone to a SLC port on the SMG-

3200, and use the system as a gateway with internal subscribers.

(2) PSTN Inbound LCR Option

SMG-3200 analyzes the dialing digits coming from PABX, KTS, and telephones

and decides whether or not the dialing is terminated.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘0’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Gateway Operation Mode >>>>>

+---+--------------------+--------------+-----------+

+---+--------------------+--------------+-----------+

+---+--------------------+--------------+-----------+

<<<<< PSTN Inbound LCR Table >>>>>

+---+----------------+---------++----+---------------+--------+

| No|

Inbound Prefix

|Max Digit|| No |

Inbound Prefix

|MaxDigit|

| | | Count || | | Count |

+---+----------------+---------++----+---------------+--------+

| 2 | | 0 || 18 | | 0 |

| 3 | | 0 || 19 | | 0 |

| 4 | | 0 || 20 | | 0 |

| 5 | | 0 || 21 | | 0 |

| 6 | | 0 || 22 | | 0 |

| 7 | | 0 || 23 | | 0 |

| 8 | | 0 || 24 | | 0 |

| 9 | | 0 || 25 | | 0 |

|10 | | 0 || 26 | | 0 |

5-17

(Continued)

| 11 | | 0 || 27 | | 0 |

| 12 | | 0 || 28 | | 0 |

| 13 | | 0 || 29 | | 0 |

| 14 | | 0 || 30 | | 0 |

| 15 | | 0 || 31 | | 0 |

| 16 | | 0 || 32 | | 0 |

| 17 | | 0 || 33 | | 0 |

+--+-----------+-------++---+----------+-------+

[ . :Exit, - :Null, Enter :Skip ]

Configuration Item Number:0

2. To change the operation mode of the SMG-3200, type ‘0’ in the above screen,

and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: 0

3. To change the operation mode to Tandem Gateway or Standalone, press ‘0’ or

‘1’ respectively, and press [Enter].

Gateway Operation Mode (0:Tandem Gateway, 1:Standalone):

Tandem Gateway ->

4. To set the PSTN Inbound LCR Option, type ‘1’ in the above

<<<<< Gateway

Operation Mode >>>>>

screen and press [Enter]. It enables PSTN Inbound LCR

Option.

Configuration Item Number: 1

5-18 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

5. Then, select 2 to 33 as a Configuration Item Number and enter Inbound Prefix

and Maxdigit count. This value analyzes dialing digits to decide the

termination of dialing.

- Inbound Prefix: the prefix pattern of dialing digits coming into SMG-3200

- Max Digit Count: The maximum number of dialing digits coming into

SMG-3200 with the designated prefix.

Configuration Item Number: 2

Inbound Prefix: ->

Max Digit Count : 0 ->

Inbound LCR PSTN Option decides whether or not the dialing

is terminated coming into SMG-3200. Generally dialing is

considered to be terminated when

‘

’

came in or dialing

timeout occurred. Without

‘

’

or dialing timeout, however,

when the designated number of dialing digits for the

assigned prefix are incoming, it is considered the dialing

termination.

This feature shortens the call connetion time for SMG-3200

because SMG-3200 decides the dialing termination without

any other termination separators.

5-19

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

Function The SMG-3200 system provides a function called PSTN rerouting (or PSTN

Detour). PSTN rerouting is used to reroute a call set by a VOIP to PSTN network

bypassing an IP network in the case of having poor QoS (Quality Of Service), or

detecting IP network being busy or disconnected or in error.

At the time of PSTN rerouting, an access code is required for PABX or KTS

connected to SMG-3200 to access the PSTN trunk line depending on the

environment of the operating site. This access code can be specified.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘1’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit >>>>>

+---+----------------------+----------+-----------+

+---+----------------------+----------+-----------+

+---+----------------------+----------+-----------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. To change the access code for PSTN Rerouting, type ‘0’, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number: 0

3. Input a trunk access code, and press [Enter].

PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit: (N: None) None ->

5-20 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[2] PCM Method

Function PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) is the most frequently used analog-to-digital

encoding (A/D conversion technique to convert analog voice into digital signal).

SMG-3200 provides 2 PCM types, which are A-law and μ-law. In this menu,

PCM type can be changed.

The PCM coding method of the PBX or KTS connected to the

SMG-3200 system must be set the same.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘2’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< PCM Method >>>>>

+---+-------------------+---------------+---------+

+---+-------------------+---------------+---------+

+---+-------------------+---------------+---------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. To change the PCM coding method, type ‘0’, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

3. To change the PCM coding method to U_LAW or A_LAW, type ‘0’ or ‘1’

respectively, and press [Enter].

PCM Type (0:U_LAW, 1:A_LAW): A_LAW ->

5-21

[3] Dial Method

Function You can set the digit transmission method and its options on the trunk connected

to a PSTN interface.

MFC (DTMF) : The digit transmission method that is used to send pressed

numbers on a tone telephone. When MFC is used, the holding

time for MFC digits must be specified on 1. DTMF Holding

Time item.

Dial Pulse : The digit transmission method that is used to send dialed numbers on

a pulse telephone.

R2MFC : The digit transmission method that is used in digital trunks such as E1

or T1. Depending on the site environment, options such as Calling

Number ID or Called Number ID must be specified.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘3’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Dial Method >>>>>

+---+----------------------+------------+---------+

+---+----------------------+------------+---------+

| 0 | Dial Type Selection | MFC | MFC |

| 1 | DTMF Holding Time | 1 | 1 |

+---+----------------------+------------+---------+

[Unit: 100msec]

+---+----------------------+------------+---------+

+---+----------------------+------------+---------+

| 2 | Calling Number Request | OFF | OFF |

| 3 | Calling Number Response | OFF | OFF |

| 4 | Called Status Request | OFF | OFF |

| 5 | Called Status Response | OFF | OFF |

| 6 | Calling Extension Response | OFF | OFF |

+---+----------------------+------------+---------+

[ . :Exit ]

5-22 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

2. Input the number of the dial method to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

3. Specify a value referring to the following table, and press [Enter].

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

0 Dial Type Selection

Selects a trunk digit transmission type.

0. MFC : Multi-Frequency (DTMF) type

1. PULSE : Pulse type

2. R2MFC : R2MFC type

1DTMF Holding Time

(1 ~ 99)

Specifies MFC digit holding time. Typed

number x 100msec is the holding time.

2 Calling Number Request

Sets whether caller’s number identification is

to be requested (ON) or not (OFF) to the

other party.

3 Calling Number Response

Sets whether you accept (ON) or not (OFF)

the other party’s request for caller’s number

identification.

4 Called Status Request Sets whether you request (ON) or not (OFF)

the other party for call status.

5 Called Status Response Sets whether you accept (ON) or not (OFF)

the caller’s request for call status.

6Calling Extension

Response

Must be specified when the SMG-3200 is

used in Standalone mode, but it is currently

not in service.

Number 0 and 1 are used in MFC type and the rest are used in

R2MFC type.

5-23

[4] SLC Signal

Function You can set the signal type of the SLC interface.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘4’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< SLI Signal >>>>>

+---+-------------------+------+---------+-------+

+---+-------------------+------+---------+-------+

| 0 | Hook Off Time | 1 | 100 msec | 1 |

| 1 | Hook On Time | 50 | 10 msec | 50 |

| 2 | Hook Flash MIN. Time | 10 | 10 msec | 10 |

| 3 | Hook Flash MAX. Time | 30 | 10 msec | 30 |

+---+-------------------+------+---------+-------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the number of the SLC signal to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

3. Specify a value referring to the following table, and press [Enter].

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

0 Hook Off Time

The minimum time elapsed to recognize hook off of

an analog telephone. Typed number x 100msec is

the actual hook off time.

1 Hook On Time

The minimum time elapsed to recognize hook on of

an analog telephone. Typed number x 10msec is the

actual hook on time.

2Hook Flash MIN.

Time

The minimum time elapsed to recognize hook flash

of an analog telephone. Typed number x 10msec is

the actual hook flash time.

3Hook Flash MAX.

Time

The maximum time elapsed to recognize hook flash

of an analog telephone. Typed number x 10msec is

the actual hook flash time.

5-24 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[5] Trunk Signal

Function You can set the signal type for analog and digital trunk.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘5’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Tru nk Sign a l >>>>>

+---+-------------------+---------------+---------+

+---+-------------------+---------------+---------+

| 1 | Insert End Of Digit | Off | Off |

| 3 | T1 Line Coding | AMI | AMI |

| 4 | T1 Signal Mode | SF | SF |

| 6 | PRI Type | EU | EU |

+---+-------------------+------+---------+--------+

+---+-------------------+------+---------+--------+

| 1 | Seize Time | 30 | 10 msec | 30 |

| 2 | Release Time | 10 | 100 msec | 10 |

| 3 | Noring Time | 4 | 1 sec | 4 |

| 4 | Answer Holding Time | 6 | 100 msec | 6 |

| 5 | CO HookOn Time | 200 | 10 msec | 200 |

| 6 | Wink Time | 20 | 10 msec | 20 |

+---+-------------------+------+---------+--------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the number of the trunk signal type to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5-25

3. Specify a value referring to the following table, and press [Enter].

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

0 Signal Type

Selects the signal type for trunk interface.

0. Immediate

1. Wink

2. Delay

1 Insert End Of Digit

Input ‘#’ to terminate dialing when SMG-3200 is

making a dialing through trunk line to PABX or

KTS.

• Off: does not input ‘#’

• On: inputs ‘#’

2D-Trunk

Master/Slave

Sets the way of synchronization of the clock of

Physical layer when E1 or T1 is used.

• Master: SMG-3200 provides a clock and PABX

and KTS synchronize with this clock. (It operates

in ISDN Network Mode when PRI trunk is used.)

• Slave: PABX or KTS provides a clock and

SMG-3000 synchronizes with this clock.

3 T1 Line Coding

Sets the encoding mode during T1 Signal mode to

prevent the signal from wandering which occurs

when you get the time information from the

transmitted signal.

• AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion): 0 (Space) and

1 (Mark) are bipolar marks. 0 changes into 0

level, and 1 changes into level of +1 and –1.

• B8ZS (Bipolar Eight Zero Substitution): When

eight zeros are being sent continuously in SX-

1and DS-1signal, 000+-0-+ substitutes for the

signal level of + and 000-+0+- substitutes for the

signal level of –.

5-26 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

(Continued)

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

4 T1 Signal Mode

Sets the transmission frame format during T1

Signal mode.

•SF (Superframing Format): Sends a superframe

made of 12 frames.

•ESF (BOM) (Extended Superframing Format by

BOM (Bit Oriented Message Mode)): sends a

extended superframe made of 24 frames.

•ESF (HDLC) (Extended Superframing Format

by HDLC (High Level Data Link Contro)): sends

a extended superframe made of 24 frames.

5 E1 CRC4

Sets the mode to encode the CRC bit in case of

E1 signal mode.

•Disable: sends the CRC bit to synchronization

signal frame without encoding

• Enable: sends the CRC bit to synchronization

signal frame with encoding

6PRI Type SMG-3200 supports a PRI protocol of EU and

KOR type in the current version.

7 PRI Channel Mode

Sets the PRI channel mode.

• Exclusive Mode: sets the channel previously

and makes a call.

• Preferred Mode: makes a call by using the

channel the counterparty decides.

* In Network (Master) Mode, only Exclusive mode is used.

8 PRI Dial Mode

Sets the way of transferring messages during PRI

dial mode.

• Enbloc Mode: transfers the messages at a time.

• OverLap Mode: transfers each message

separately.

9 Seize Time

The time elapsed for a seizure signal being

maintained until hook off is detected. Typed

number x 10msec is the actual seize time.

10 Release Time

The time elapsed for a release signal being

maintained until trunk connection is off. Typed

number x 100msec is the actual release time.

5-27

(Continued)

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

11 Noring Time

The time elapsed for the process of transmission

being abandoned when a hook off signal is not

maintained from the moment a hook off is

detected and responded. Typed number x 1sec is

the actual time.

12 Answer Holding

Time

The time elapsed to keep the response signal to a

hook off. Typed number x 100msec is the actual

time.

13 CO HookOn Time

The time elapsed to evaluate a hook on signal

when connected to a trunk. Typed number x

10msec is the actual time.

14 Wink Time

The time elapsed to respond to a signal wink in

wink mode. Typed number x 10msec is the actual

time.

5-28 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[6] Call Control Method

Function You can set the signal type required to process a call.

The items in this menu have different default values for Tandem

Gateway and Standalone modes.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘6’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Call Control Method >>>>>

+---+------------------+------+---------+---------+

+---+------------------+------+---------+---------+

| 0 | First Digit Time | 5 | 1 sec | 5(10) |

| 1 | Inter Digit Time | 2 | 1 sec | 2(10) |

+---+------------------+------+---------+---------+

+---+------------------+------+---------+---------+

| 2 | Loop OK Time | 60 | 100 msec | 60(60) |

| 3 | OK Release Time | 80 | 100 msec | 80(80) |

+---+------------------+------+---------+---------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the number of the call control method to be changed,, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5-29

3. Specify a value referring to the following table, and press [Enter].

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

0 First Digit Time

The time elapsed to receive the first digit after

hook off. Typed number x 1sec is the actual

time.

1 Inter Digit Time

The maximum time between the received digits

after hook off. Typed number x 1sec is the

actual time.

2 Loop OK Time

The time elapsed to receive a response after an

attempt to seize a trunk is made. Typed number

x 100msec is the actual time.

3 OK Release Time

The time elapsed until a response is received

after a release to a trunk seize is attempted.

Typed number x 100msec is the actual time.

5-30 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[7] Ring Cadence

Function You can distinguish the ring type by setting the ring cadence (interval between

rings). Sets the cadence in units of 100msec.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘7’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Ring Cadence >>>>>

+---+------------+-------+-------+--------+-------+

| | Ring Cadence (Default Value) Unit: 100msec |

+---+------------+-------+-------+--------+-------+

| 0 | SLI | 4( 4) | 2( 2) | 4( 4) | 20(20) |

| 1 | TRUNK | 4( 4) | 2( 2) | 4( 4) | 20(20) |

+---+------------+-------+-------+--------+-------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the number of the ring cadence to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5-31

3. Set the cadence for the selected ring type, and press [Enter]. Typed number x

100msec is the actual time.

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Item in Detail

Item in DetailItem in Detail

Item in Detail Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

SLI Ring 1st on Time The time elapsed for the first SLI

ring to be ON.

SLI Ring 1st off Time The time elapsed for the first SLI

ring to be OFF.

SLI Ring 2nd on Time The time elapsed for the second SLI

ring to be ON.

0SLI

SLI Ring 2nd off Time The time elapsed for the second SLI

ring to be OFF.

TRUNK Ring 1st on Time The time elapsed for the first trunk

ring to be ON.

TRUNK Ring 1st off Time The time elapsed for the first trunk

ring to be OFF.

TRUNK Ring 2nd on

Time

The time elapsed for the second

trunk ring to be ON.

1TRUNK

TRUNK Ring 2nd off

Time

The time elapsed for the second

trunk ring to be OFF.

In the standalone mode, SLI ring is used for the call between

the telephone connected to SLC, and TRUNK ring is used for

the rest of the case.

5-32 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[8] System Tone Cadence

Function You can set the tone cadence that is sent by the SMG-3200. Sets the tone cadence

by tone type in units of 50msec.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘8’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< System Tone Cadence >>>>>

+---+-----------+--------+-------+--------+-------+

| | Tone Cadence (Default Value) Unit: 50msec |

+---+-----------+--------+-------+--------+-------+

| 0 | Dial | 1( 1) | 1( 1) | 20(20) | 5( 5) |

| 1 | Busy | 10(10) | 10(10) | 10(10) | 10(10) |

| 2 | Transfer | 2( 2) | 2( 2) | 2( 2) | 2( 2) |

| 3 | Ring Back | 20(20) | 40(40) | 20(20) | 40(40) |

| 4 | Error | 5( 5) | 5( 5) | 5( 5) | 5( 5) |

+---+-----------+--------+-------+--------+-------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the number of the system tone cadence to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

3. Set the cadence for the selected ring type, and press [Enter]. Typed number x

50msec is the actual time.

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Item in Detail

Item in DetailItem in Detail

Item in Detail Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

DIAL 1st on Time The time elapsed for the first dial tone

to be On.

DIAL 1st off Time The time elapsed for the first dial tone

to be Off.

DIAL 2nd on Time The time elapsed for the second dial

tone to be On.

Dial

Tone

DIAL 2nd off Time The time elapsed for the second dial

tone to be Off.

5-33

(Continued)

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Item in Detail

Item in DetailItem in Detail

Item in Detail Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

BUSY 1st on Time The time elapsed for the first busy

tone to be On.

BUSY 1st off Time The time elapsed for the first busy

tone to be Off.

BUSY 2nd on Time The time elapsed for the second busy

tone to be On.

Busy

Tone

BUSY 2nd off Time The time elapsed for the second busy

tone to be Off.

TRANSFER 1st on Time The time elapsed for the first transfer

tone to be On.

TRANSFER 1st off Time The time elapsed for the first transfer

tone to be Off.

TRANSFER 2nd on

Time

The time elapsed for the second

transfer tone to be On.

Transfer

Tone

TRANSFER 2nd off

Time

The time elapsed for the second

transfer tone to be Off.

RING BACK 1st on Time The time elapsed for the first Ring

Back tone to be On.

RING BACK 1st off Time The time elapsed for the first Ring

Back tone to be Off.

RING BACK 2nd

on Time

The time elapsed for the second Ring

Back tone to be On.

Ring

Back

Tone

RING BACK 2nd

off Time

The time elapsed for the second Ring

Back tone to be Off.

ERROR 1st on Time The time elapsed for the first Error

tone to be On.

ERROR 1st off Time The time elapsed for the first Error

tone to be Off.

ERROR 2nd on Time The time elapsed for the second Error

tone to be On.

Error

Tone

ERROR 2nd off Time The time elapsed for the second Error

tone to be Off.

When the time of 1st On and 1st Off is 1, it means continuous

tone without cadence control.

5-34 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[9] CO Tone Cadence

Function You can set CO tone cadence to identify tones coming from a CO when the SMG-

3200 is connected to a CO line. The tone cadence can be set to units of 50msec by

tone type.

This feature is not used in the current version.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘9’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< CO Tone Cadence >>>>>

+---+----------+---------+---------+-------+------+

| | CO Tone Cadence (Default Value) Unit: 50msec |

+---+----------+---------+---------+-------+------+

| 0 | Busy | 10(10) | 10(10) | 10(10) | 10(10) |

| 1 | Ring Back | 20(20) | 40(40) | 20(20) | 0(40) |

| 2 | Dial | 20(20) | 5( 5) | 20(20) | 5( 5) |

+---+----------+---------+---------+-------+------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the number of the CO tone cadence to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5-35

3. Set the CO tone cadence referring to the following table, and press [Enter].

Typed number x 50msec is the actual time.

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Item in Detail

Item in DetailItem in Detail

Item in Detail Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

BUSY CO TONE

1st on Time

The time elapsed for the first busy tone

to be On.

BUSY CO TONE

1st off Time

The time elapsed for the first busy tone

to be Off.

BUSY CO TONE

2nd on Time

The time elapsed for the second busy

tone to be On.

Busy

(Trunk

Busy

Tone)

BUSY CO TONE

2nd off Time

The time elapsed for the second busy

tone to be Off.

RING BACK CO

TONE 1st on Time

The time elapsed for the first ring back

tone to be On.

RING BACK

CO TONE 1st off

Time

The time elapsed for the first ring back

tone to be Off

RING BACK

CO TONE 2nd on

Time

The time elapsed for the second ring

back tone to be On

Ring

Back

(Trunk

Ring

Back

Tone) RING BACK

CO TONE 2nd off

Time

The time elapsed for the second ring

back tone to be Off.

DIAL CO TONE

1st on Time

The time elapsed for the first dial tone to

be On.

DIAL CO TONE

1st off Time

The time elapsed for the first dial tone to

be Off.

DIAL CO TONE

2nd on Time

The time elapsed for the second dial tone

to be On.

Dial

(Trunk

Dial

Tone)

DIAL CO TONE

2nd off Time

The time elapsed for the second dial tone

to be Off.

5-36 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[10] Gain Control

Function You can adjust call quality (gain control) depending on the connection type, i.e.

analog telephone, analog trunk or digital trunk line. Each gain is set in units of dB.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘10’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Gain Control >>>>>

+----+-----------------------+-------+---------+

| | ( 0:0dB 1:1.9Db 2:-6dB 3:-2.5dB ) |

+----+-----------------------+-------+---------+

| 0 | SLI -> SLI | 0 | 0 |

| 1 | SLI -> ATRK | 0 | 0 |

| 2 | SLI -> DTRK | 0 | 0 |

| 3 | ATRK -> SLI | 0 | 0 |

| 4 | ATRK -> ATRK | 0 | 0 |

| 5 | ATRK -> DTRK | 0 | 0 |

| 6 | DTRK -> SLI | 1 | 1 |

| 7 | DTRK -> ATRK | 0 | 0 |

| 8 | DTRK -> DTRK | 0 | 0 |

+----+-----------------------+-------+---------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the number of the gain control to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5-37

3. Set value of gain referring to the following table, and press [Enter].

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

0SLI

➔ SLI Specifies the call quality that transmits from TX to

RX of analog telephone.

1SLI

➔ ATRK Specifies the call quality that transmits from TX of

analog telephone to RX of analog trunk.

2SLI

➔ DTRK Specifies the call quality that transmits from TX of

analog telephone to RX of digital trunk.

3ATRK

➔ SLI Specifies the call quality that transmits from TX of

analog trunk to RX of analog telephone.

4ATRK

➔ ATRK Specifies the call quality that transmits from TX of

analog trunk to RX of analog trunk.

5ATRK

➔ DTRK Specifies the call quality that transmits from TX of

analog trunk to RX of digital trunk.

6DTRK

➔ SLI Specifies the call quality that transmits from TX of

digital trunk to RX of analog telephone.

7DTRK

➔ ATRK Specifies the call quality that transmits from TX of

digital trunk to RX of analog trunk

8DTRK

➔ DTRK Specifies the call quality that transmits from TX of

digital trunk to RX of digital trunk.

ATRK refers to LOOP and E&M, DTRK refers to VoIP and

E1/PRI, T1, and SLI refers to SLC.

5-38 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[11] Diagnosis

Function You can set a regular interval to diagnose the PSTN interface of the SMG-3200.

Setting it to ‘0’ it bypasses the diagnosis. You can set the interval at units of 1sec

by the test type.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘11’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Diagnosis >>>>>

+---+------------------+---------+--------+-------+

+---+------------------+---------+--------+-------+

| 0 | SLI Port Test | 0 | 1 sec | 0 |

| 1 | Trunk Seizure Test | 0 | 1 sec | 0 |

| 2 | Trunk CODEC Test | 0 | 1 sec | 0 |

+---+------------------+---------+--------+-------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the number of the diagnosis interval to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

3. Set the diagnosis interval referring to the following table, and press [Enter].

Typed number x 1sec is the actual time.

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

0 SLI Port Test Sets the diagnosis interval for SLI port test.

1 Trunk Seizure Test It sets the diagnosis interval for trunk seizure

test.

2 Trunk CODEC Test It sets the diagnosis interval for trunk CODEC

test.

SLI refers to SLC, Trunk refers to LOOP and E&M.

When you test the E&M port, you should connect the E&M JIG.

5-39

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

Function You can set Block/UnBlock on each port of the system. ‘Block’ indicates

‘disabled to use’ and ‘UnBlock’ indicates ‘enabled to use’.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘12’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< MMC Port Block/UnBlock >>>>>

+----+--------------------------------------------+

| Port | Slot No. (0:UnBlock, 1:Block, -:UnUsed) |

| No. | 0(VoIP) | 1(USL1) | 2(USL2) | 3(D-TRK) |

+----+----------+----------+----------+-----------+

| 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - |

| 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - |

| 2 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - |

| 3 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - |

| 4 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - |

| 5 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - |

| 6 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - |

| 7 | 0 | 0 | 0 | - |

| 8 | - | - | - | - |

| 9 | - | - | - | - |

| A | - | - | - | - |

| B | - | - | - | - |

| C | - | - | - | - |

| D | - | - | - | - |

| E | - | - | - | - |

| F | - | - | - | - |

| 10 | - | - | - | - |

| 11 | - | - | - | - |

| 12 | - | - | - | - |

| 13 | - | - | - | - |

| 14 | - | - | - | - |

| 15 | - | - | - | - |

| 16 | - | - | - | - |

| 17 | - | - | - | - |

| 18 | - | - | - | - |

| 19 | - | - | - | - |

| 1A | - | - | - | - |

| 1B | - | - | - | - |

| 1C | - | - | - | - |

| 1D | - | - | - | - |

+----+----------+----------+----------+-----------+

[ . :Exit ]

5-40 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

2. Type ‘1’ to block or ‘2’ to unblock, and press [Enter].

Select Block or UnBlock (1: Block, 2: UnBlock) ->

3. Input the slot number for the port specified to be unblocked, and press [Enter].

Blocking Slot Number: (0: VoIP, 1: USL1, 2: USL2, 3: D-TRK)

4. Input the port number, and press [Enter].

Blocking Port No. of VoIP Slot (Range: 0 ~ 0x1F) [ . :Exit ] ->

5. You can continue with other ports by typing in the corresponding port number

and pressing [Enter].

Blocking Port No. of VoIP Slot (Range: 0 ~ 0x1F) [ . :Exit ] ->

6. To exit, type ‘.’, and press [Enter]. You will return to the <PSTN Configuration

Menu> screen.

5-41

[13] Display Slot Configuration

Function Displays type of cards that are installed on each slot of the system.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘13’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< Display Slot Configuration >>>>

+-----------+------------------+------------------+

| Slot No | Card Type | Port Count |

+-----------+------------------+------------------+

| 0( VoIP ) | VoIP_04 | 8 |

| 1( US1 ) | LOOP | 8 |

| 2( US2 ) | SLI | 8 |

| 3( D-TRK ) | None | 0 |

+-----------+------------------+------------------+

[ . :Exit ]

[ . : Exit ], [ 1 : Re-play ]:

2. The following information will be displayed.

NoNo

No Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

0VOIP

You can identify the type of VoIP card and number of ports

installed on VOIP slot. There are two types of VOIP cards,

VoIP_04 and VoIP_304 depending on the type of DSP chip.

1US1 You can identify the type of cards and number of ports

installed on US1 slot.

2US2 You can identify the type of cards and number of ports

installed on US2 slot.

3D-TRK

You can identify the type of digital trunk connected on E1/

PRI, T1 port and number of ports.

5-42 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[14] Display Port Status

Function You can view the status of each port installed in the system slots.

Procedure 1. In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘14’, and press [Enter].

2. When the following message appears, input the slot number to display, and

press [Enter].

Slot Number [0: VoIP, 1: US1, 2: US2, 3: D-TRK] :

3. Port status of the selected slot will appear as follows:

<<<<< Display Port Status >>>>>

[VoIP]

+-------+---------+----------+---------+---------+--------+

+-------+---------+----------+---------+---------+--------+

| 0 | VoIP_04 | Normal | UnBlock | C0 | FF |

| 1 | VoIP_04 | Normal | UnBlock | C0 | FF |

| 2 | VoIP_04 | Normal | UnBlock | C0 | FF |

| 3 | VoIP_04 | Normal | UnBlock | C0 | FF |

| 4 | VoIP_04 | Normal | UnBlock | C0 | FF |

| 5 | VoIP_04 | Normal | UnBlock | C0 | FF |

| 6 | VoIP_04 | Normal | UnBlock | C0 | FF |

| 7 | VoIP_04 | Normal | UnBlock | C0 | FF |

+-------+---------+----------+---------+---------+--------+

[ . :Exit ]

Slot Number [0: VoIP, 1: US1, 2: US2, 3: D-TRK] :

yPort No : The port number on the slot.

yCard Type : The card type installed in the slot.

yFault Block : Indicates an error on the selected port. When the port is

operated normal, it shows ‘Normal’.

5-43

yMMC Block : Indicates the operational status of the related port. ‘UnBlock’

indicates ‘enabled to use’, ‘Block’ indicates ‘disabled to use’.

yCall State : Indicates the internal process status of a call. This value is used

to trace the call processing status.

yOpp. Port : Indicates the relative port number of the selected port. It can also

be used to test trace call status.

4. To continue to check the status of other slots, input the slot number to check.

Slot Number [0: VoIP, 1: US1, 2: US2, 3: D-TRK] :

5-44 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[15] Save & Exit

Function After saving changes, it closes the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, and

returns to the main menu screen.

Procedure In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘15’, and press [Enter].

[16] Exit

Function Without saving changes, it closes the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, and

returns to the main menu screen.

Procedure In the <PSTN Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘16’, and press [Enter].

5-45

VoIP Configuration Menu

In the VoIP Configuration Menu, you can control the IP interface that connects to the SMG-3200.

You can also set IP routing information together with VoIP features.

At the prompt on the startup screen, type ‘VoIPmenu’ and press [Enter]. The following screen will

be displayed.

<<<<< VoIP Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] VoIP General Option

[1] VoIP DSP Option

[2] VoIP Gatekeeper Option

[3] VoIP Routing Table

[4] VoIP Caller ID Table

[5] VoIP Remote IP Table

[6] VoIP Remote IP Status

[7] Save & Exit

[8] Exit

Select ?

The following is an overview of the 8 submenus found in the VoIP Configuration Menu.

NoNo

No Menu

MenuMenu

Menu Functions

FunctionsFunctions

Functions

0 VoIP General Option Sets general options for VoIP services.

1 VoIP DSP Option Sets DSP (Digital Signal Processing) options for VoIP

services.

2 VoIP Gatekeeper Option Sets connection options for Gatekeeper.

3 VoIP Routing Table Sets types of connection for VoIP sending and incoming call

services.

4 VoIP Caller IP Table Sets the Caller ID for external calling through IP Network

5 VoIP Remote IP Table Sets IP address of VoIP IP Table.

6 VoIP Remote IP Status Checks each IP status in VoIP IP Table.

7 Save & Exit Closes the VoIP Configuration Menu screen with saving

changes.

8Exit Closes the VoIP Configuration Menu screen without saving

changes.

5-46 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[0] VoIP General Option

Function You can set general options for VoIP services.

Procedure 1. In the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘0’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP General Option >>>>>

+---+------------------------+--------+---------+

+---+------------------------+--------+---------+

| 1 | Gateway ID | 3200 | .. |

| 2 | Caller ID Type | ANI | ANI |

| 4 | DTMF Signal Type | H.245 | H.245 |

| 5 | FAX Signal Type | T.38 | T.38 |

| 6 | H.245 Open in FastStart | Yes | Yes |

| 7 | H.245 Tunneling | No | No |

| 8 | DIL Number | 201 | .. |

| 9 | SNMP Server IP | 0.0.0.0 | .. |

| 10 | Signaling Port | 10000 | 10000 |

| 11 | Status Monitoring Port | 20000 | 20000 |

| 12 | WCS Port | 20010 | 20010 |

| 13 | SIGK Access Port | 20020 | 20020 |

| 14 | Status Monitoring Period(sec) | 0 | 0 |

| 15 | Max. Fax Service Count | 8 | 8 |

| 16 | No Answer Waiting Time(sec) | 90 | 90 |

+---+------------------------+--------+---------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the item number to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5-47

3. Set values for the selected item referring to the following table, and press

[Enter].

No Item Description

0Signal

Type

Selects H.323 signal type.

0. SlowStart : Q.931 ➔ H.245 ➔ Connection to Media

1. FastStart : Q.931 ➔ Connection to Media

1Gateway

Sets the SMG-3200’s Gateway ID. If Caller ID Type is

GWID, it is the ID information that is sent to the other party.

2Caller ID

Type

When sending a VoIP call via IP network, it selects the

Caller ID type that is sent from the SMG-3200 to recipients.

0. GWID: Uses Gateway ID number.

1. ANI: Uses Calling Numbers that are sent by PBX at

sender’s end.

2. IP: Uses IP address.

3. GWD+ANI: Uses Gateway ID number and Calling

Numbers that are sent by PBX at sender’s end.

4. Caller ID Table: Uses Caller ID in the Caller ID Table

Virtual

Ring Back

Tone

Sets whether to use virtual Ring Back Tone.

0. Disable: Do not use virtual Ring Back Tone.

1. Enable (Setup): uses virtual Ring Back Tone when

sending setup.

2. Enable (Alert): uses virtual Ring Back Tone when

receiving Alert.

DTMF

Signal

Type

Sets DTMP process method via IP network.

0. Inband:The DTMF signaling process through voice

channels.

1. H.245: The DTMF signaling process through H.245

signal method.

FAX

Signal

Type

Internet fax is processed in the real-time event relay method.

It sets a protocol for it.

0. T.38 : Uses standard T.38 fax protocol.

1. Samsung : Uses Samsung own protocol.

H.245

Open in

FastStart

At the time of Fast Start, specifies (in terms of Yes/No) if

H.245 channel is to be opened using H.245 channel

information in setup information.

5-48 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

(Continued)

No Item Description

7H.245

tunneling

H.245 signalling does not need any additional channel.

It is possible to use the Q.931 signalling channel together.

8DIL

Number

When a dial digit is not included in incoming calls on IP

network, specifies a number to determine a call.

9SNMP

Server IP

When the SMG-3200 is connected with network

management equipment with SNMP protocol, it inputs IP

address of the network management equipment.

10 Signaling

Port

Indicates the port number in IP for H.323 signaling. It

also sets the range of port numbers allowed by firewall

equipment. When a specific port is specified, up to the

number of VoIP channels x 4 from the specific port, can

be used. This function will be available soon.

Status

Monitori

ng Port

Sets the range of port numbers for exchange of system

status information between the SMG-3200. The specified

port plus (specified port +1) can be used.

12 WCS

Port

Specifies the communication port connecting Samsung’s

Web Call Service terminal.

SIGK

Access

Port

Specifies the communication port connecting Samsung’s

Internet Gatekeeper. The specified port plus (specified

port +1) can be used.

Status

Monitori

ng Period

Sets the status monitoring period between Samsung’s

VoIP Gateways. It is only to be used when the SMG-3200

is connected to Samsung’s VoIP Gateway.

Max. Fax

Service

Count

Sets the max allowable number of Internet fax channels

with the SMG-3200. (Max. 8 no)

Answer

Waiting

Time (sec)

Sets the max waiting time to wait when the party does not

answer after call connection.

5-49

[1] VoIP DSP Option

Function You can set DSP (Digital Signal Processing) options for VoIP services.

Procedure 1. In the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘1’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP DSP Option >>>>>

+---+---------------------+----------+----------+

+---+---------------------+----------+----------+

| 0 | Audio Codec | G.729a(8K) | G.729a(8K) |

| 5 | Input Gain (dB) | 0 | 0 dB |

| 6 | Voice Volume (dB) | 0 | 0 dB |

| 7 | Multi-Frame Counter | 2 | 2 |

| 8 | Jitter Optimizing Factor | 4 | 4 |

| 9 | RTP Delay Limit(msec) | 500 | 500 msec |

| 10 | RTP Loss Limit(%) | 10 | 10 % |

| 11 | RTP Loss Check Period(sec) | 30 | 30 sec |

| 12 | RTP Over Limit Count | 1 | 1 |

+---+---------------------+----------+----------+

[ . :Exit ]

2. Input the item number to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5-50 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

3. Set the values for the selected item referring to the following table, and press

[Enter].

No Item Description

0 Audio Codec

Selects VoIP Codec.

1. G.711 (64K)

2. G.723.1 (6.3K)

3. G.729a (8K)

4. G.729 (8K)

1Echo

Cancellation

Echo Cancellation is the function to remove echo that

is generated by voice reflection on Packet Delay and

PSTN. It enables/disables this function.

2Silence

Suppression

Silence Suppression is the function to prevent

transmission of voice packet by detecting ‘mute’

during a call. It enables/disables this function.

3 High Pass Filter Voice filter, which must always be set as ‘Enable’.

4 Post Filter Voice filter, which must always be set as ‘Enable’.

5 Input Gain Quality of PCM voice that is input via VoIP DSP. It

sets it to the site environment.

6 Voice Volume Volume of voice packet when it is PCM processed. It

sets it to the site environment.

7Multi-Frame

Counter

Sets the buffering number when voice packets are

transmitted to network. The voice packets are

buffered to the set number and set as a single RTP

packet.

8Jitter Optimizing

Factor

Sets the control standard for Jitter Buffering that is

required in the PCM process of received voice

packets from network.

When it is set below 4, it focuses on process of

Packet Loss. When it is set above 4, it focuses on

Packet Delay.

9 RTP Delay Limit

Sets the delay limit on voice packets received

through RTP. When the limit is exceeded during

communication, it is used as a basic index for

network error.

5-51

(Continued)

No Item Description

10 RTP Loss Limit

Sets the loss limit on voice packets received through

RTP. When the limit is exceeded during

communication, it is used as a basic index for

network error.

11 RTP Loss Check

Period Sets the RTP Loss check period.

12 RTP OverLimit

Count

When the RTP Delay Limit or RTP Loss Limit is

exceeded, it sets the standard accumulated frequency

to be used as a basic index for network error.

FAX Error

Connection

Mode

Sets the additional recovery feature for T.38 FAX

error.

5-52 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[2] VoIP Gatekeeper Option

Function You can set information required for Gatekeeper connection when the SMG-3200

is to be connected to Gatekeeper.

Procedure 1. In the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘2’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP Gatekeeper Option >>>>>

+---+-----------------------+-------------+-------+

+---+-----------------------+-------------+-------+

| 5 | Gatekeeper IP | 0.0.0.0 | .. |

| 6 | Gatekeeper Alias | Gatekeeper | .. |

| 7 | Alternative Gatekeeper IP | 0.0.0.0 | .. |

| 9 | Gateway Name | H.323 ID | SMG3200 | .. |

| 10 | | E.164 | 3200 | .. |

+---+-----------------------+-------------+-------+

[ . :Exit, - :Null ]

2. Input the item number to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5-53

3. Set values for the selected item referring to the following table, and press

[Enter]. The settings of No.6,9,10 can be ‘Null’, when if necessary. In that

case, it sends the ‘Null’ to the connected Gatekeeper.

No Item Description

0Gatekeeper

Connection Sets whether Gatekeeper is to be connected.

Gatekeeper

Status

Displays the current status of connection to

Gatekeeper.

• Unregistration : Indicates ‘no-connection’.

• Registration : Indicates ‘connection’.

1 RAS Method

Selects manual to connect to the Gatekeeper or not

according to the Prefix, and selects Auto for the rest of

the case.

2Registration

Type

Sets the registration type for Gateway when it

registered to Gatekeeper. The types include E.164 ID

of Gateway mode and Caller ID in the Caller ID Table.

3Gatekeeper

Type

Specifies the manufacturer of Gatekeeper.

SIGK : Select if Samsung Internet Gatekeeper is to be

connected..

Other GK : Select if other company’s Gatekeeper is to

be connected.

4GW Routing In

GK mode

This feature is used when SMG-3200 analyzes the

dialing digits when it is connected to Gatekeeper.

Generally Gatekeeper analyzes the digits, but with this

feature, SMG-3200 analyzes the dialing digits using

the data in VoIP Outbound Routing Table of [3] VoIP

Routing Table.

5 Gatekeeper IP Sets IP address of the Gatekeeper to be connected.

6Gatekeeper

Alias

Sets H.323 Alias Name of the Gatekeeper to be

connected.

7Alternative

Gatekeeper IP

When Gatekeeper is to be duplicated, and the

connection to the primary Gatekeeper is disconnected,

it sets the other Gatekeeper’s IP address.

5-54 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

(Continued)

No Item Description

8Gatekeeper

Down Option

Sets the type of routing that may be used in case the

connection to the Gatekeeper in use becomes

disconnected.

0. Alternative GK : Connects to the alternative

Gatekeeper set in the above item 4.

1. PSTN : Uses PSTN rerouting.

9Gateway Name

H.323 ID

Sets H.323 ID to be registered as ID of SMG-3200

with Gatekeeper.

10 Gateway Name

E.164

Sets E.164 to be registered as ID of SMG-3200 with

Gatekeeper.

5-55

[3] VoIP Routing Table

Function You can set the type of connection to another party’s VoIP equipment depending

on the prefix of sent VoIP calls to IP network.

Procedure 1. In the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘3’, and press [Enter].

VoIP Routing Table (0:Outbound Routing Table, 1: Inbound Routing

Table) -> 0

2. In the above screen, type ‘0’ to view Routing table.

<<<<<󰚟VoIP󰚟Outbound󰚟Routing󰚟Table󰚟>>>>>

󰚟󰚟

+----+-----------+--------+--------+-----------+-------------+----------+-----+

+----+-----------+--------+--------+-----------+------+------+----------+-----+

|󰚟󰚟0󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟1󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟2󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟2󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟3󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟3󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟4󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟4󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟5󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟5󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟6󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟6󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟7󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟7󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟8󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟8󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟9󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟9󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟10󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟255󰚟|󰚟󰚟255󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟󰛽󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰛽󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰛽󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰛽󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰛽󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰛽󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰛽󰚟󰚟|

|󰚟63󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟255󰚟|󰚟󰚟255󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

+----+-----------+--------+--------+-----------+-------------+----------+-----+

3. Input the routing table number to be changed, and press [Enter]. It sets the way

of handling dialing digits sent to IP Network though SMG-3200.

Configuration Item Number:

5-56 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

4. Set the values for the selected item referring to the following table, and press

[Enter].

Item Description

Access Code Inputs the Prefix Digit that can identify the other party to be

connected. The maximum length of Prefix Digit is 8 .

Acc Code Length Sets the length of access code. (0~8)

Acc Code

Del-Len

Inputs the number of digit to be deleted from the access code.

It analyzes the access code and deletes to the set length

before it sends the remainder digits to the other party. (0~8)

Insert Digit

After it analyzes and deletes digits from access codes, it sets

prefix to be added to the access codes. It normally uses the

other party’s Trunk access code. The maximum length of

Insert Digit is 8.

IP Table Index1

IP Table Index2

Sets IP table numbers that store IP address data of the other

party’s VoIP device. Each IP table can have up to 32 IP

addresses, and can set 2 IP tables per access code.

IP Table Start

Point

When multiple IP addresses exist in the specified IP table, it

sets which IP address is to be connected first. It is used to

diversify routing when one access code is used for

connecting multiple VoIP Gateways.

GK Use Decides whether to use Gatekeeper for the corresponding

access.

5. Now type ‘1’ in VoIP Routing Table to set the Prefix.

VoIP Routing Table (0: Outbound Routing Table, 1:Inbound

Routing Table)->1

5-57

(Continued)

<<<<<󰚟VoIP󰚟Outbound󰚟Routing󰚟Table󰚟>>>>>

󰚟󰚟

+----+-----------+--------+--------+-----------+-------------+----------+-----+

+----+-----------+--------+--------+-----------+------+------+----------+-----+

|󰚟󰚟0󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟1󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟2󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟2󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟3󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟3󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟4󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟4󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟5󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟5󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟6󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟6󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟7󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟7󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟8󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟8󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

|󰚟󰚟9󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟9󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟1󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟|󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟0󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟|󰚟Yes󰚟|

+----+-----------+--------+--------+-----------+-------------+----------+-----+

6. Input the routing table number to be changed, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5-58 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

7. Set the values for the selected item referring to the following table, and press

[Enter].

Item

ItemItem

Item Description

DescriptionDescription

Description

Access Code The Prefix pattern of the incoming dialing digits. The

maximum length of Access Code digit is 16.

Acc Code

Length The number of Access Code digits (0~16)

Acc Code

Del-Len

The number of digits to be deleted from the access

code.(0~16)

Insert Digit

The prefix to be added to the access codes after it is

analyzed and deleted. The maximum length of Insert Digit

is 8.

5-59

[4] VoIP Caller ID Table

Function You can set the Caller ID when sending a call through IP Network. Caller ID can

be set separately according to the PSTN ports of SMG-3200.

To use this feature, the second item of [0] VoIP General Option, Caller ID Type,

must be set to Caller ID Table.

Description 1. In the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘4’, and press [Enter].

<<<<< VoIP Caller ID Table >>>>>

+----------+-----------++----------+------------+

| PSTN Port Index | Caller ID || PSTN Port Index | Caller ID |

+----------+-----------++----------+------------+

| 0 | || 15 | |

| 1 | || 16 | |

| 2 | || 17 | |

| 3 | || 18 | |

| 4 | || 19 | |

| 5 | || 20 | |

| 6 | || 21 | |

| 7 | || 22 | |

| 8 | || 23 | |

| 9 | || 24 | |

| 10 | || 25 | |

| 11 | || 26 | |

| 12 | || 27 | |

| 13 | || 28 | |

| 14 | || 29 | |

+----------+-----------++----------+------------+

[ . :Exit, - :Null, Enter :Skip ]

2. When the following message appears, input the index number of the PSTN

Port, and press [Enter].

Configuration Port Index:

3. Select PSTN Port Index and enter Caller ID.

Caller ID for PSTN Port : -> 12345

5-60 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[5] VoIP Remote IP Table

Function More than one IP address must be specified in the VoIP IP Table that is set by the

VoIP Routing Table for VoIP outgoing call services. The VoIP IP Table is the table

containing the IP address information of another party’s VoIP device, which will

be connected with access codes. Each IP table can have up to 32 IP addresses.

Procedure 1. In the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘5’, and press [Enter].

2. When the following message appears, input the index number of the table for

setting IP addresses, and press [Enter].

IP Table Index Number(Range: 0 ~ 31):

3. The IP table of the selected index will appear below.

<<<<< VoIP Remote IP Table >>>>>

+---+------------------+-------+------------------+

| No | IP Address | No | IP Address |

+---+------------------+-------+------------------+

| 0 | 165.213.81.230 | 16 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 1 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 17 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 2 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 18 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 3 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 19 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 4 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 20 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 5 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 21 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 6 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 22 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 7 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 23 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 8 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 24 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 9 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 25 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 10 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 26 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 11 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 27 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 12 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 28 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 13 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 29 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 14 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 30 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

| 15 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | 31 | 0. 0. 0. 0 |

+---+------------------+-------+------------------+

[ . :Exit ]

5-61

4. Input the table number to set IP addresses, and press [Enter].

Configuration Item Number:

5. When the following message appears, type in an IP address and press [Enter].

IP Address (dot form): 0.0.0.0 ->

5-62 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[6] VoIP Remote IP Status

Function You can display the status of each IP address in the VoIP IP Table. With the SMG-

3200 Gateway function of monitoring status, this menu provides accurate status

information.

Procedure 1. In the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘6’, and press [Enter].

2. When the following message appears, type in the index number of the table to

display status of IP addresses, and press [Enter].

IP Table Index Number(Range: 0 ~ 31):

3. The selected IP Table will appear below.

<<<<< VoIP Remote IP Status >>>>>

Table Index[0]

+---+------------+------+----+-----------+--------+

+---+------------+------+----+-----------+--------+

| 0 | 165.213.81.230 | Idle | 16 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 1 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 17 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 2 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 18 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 3 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 19 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 4 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 20 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 5 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 21 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 6 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 22 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 7 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 23 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 8 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 24 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 9 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 25 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 10 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 26 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 11 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 27 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 12 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 28 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 13 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 29 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle|

| 14 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 30 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

| 15 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle | 31 | 0. 0. 0. 0 | Idle |

+---+------------+------+----+-----------+--------+

[:Exit ]

5-63

Unless the value of 14

item of [0] VoIP General Option,

Status Monitoring Period, is

‘

’

, you get the exact

information. This feature can be used only when SMG-3200 is

connected to Samsung Gateway.

4. The following status information may be displayed.

y Idle : Indicates ‘normal status’ to access VoIP outgoing call services.

y Busy : Indicates ‘all ports are busy’ to process new VoIP outgoing calls.

y Block : Indicates that the local Gatekeeper or the Gateway connected to the

SMG-3200 is down, or the link is in error.

5. To continue to check the status of the IP address table, type in the index

number of the table.

IP Table Index Number(Range: 0 ~ 31):

5-64 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

[7] Save & Exit

Function After saving changes, it closes the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, and

returns to the main menu screen.

Procedure In the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘7’, and press [Enter].

[8] Exit

Function Without saving changes, it closes the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, and

returns to the main menu screen.

Procedure In the <VoIP Configuration Menu> screen, type ‘8’, and press [Enter].

5-65

CLI Command Menu

The CLI Command Menu displays the list of CLI commands, which SMG-3200 system

administrators can use, and provides simple directions.

At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'clicmd,' and press [Enter]. Then, the screen displays a list of

simple descriptions of available CLI commands as follows:

<<<<< CLI Command Menu >>>>>

clicmd

cdrhelp

date

dbfilehelp

optionhelp

settime y,M,d,h,s

The commands displayed in the CLI Command Menu can be summarized as follows:

MenuMenu

Menu Functions

FunctionsFunctions

Functions

clicmd Display CLI commands.

cdrhelp Display commands related to the use of CDR information.

date Display the current time.

dbfilehelp Display commands related to the backup and saving of DB.

optionhelp Display other commands that can be set as options.

settime y,M,d,h,m,s Manually set the system time.

Detailed directions for use of the CLI commands are provided below.

Print This List

Help CDR Command

Display the Current Time

Help DB Backup & Restore Command

Help Option Command

Set Time yyyy,

M(1~12),d(1~31),h(0~23),m(0~59),s(0~5)

5-66 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

clicmd

Function It displays the list of CLI commands that the user can use to operate the system.

Procedure Type ‘clicmd’ at the SMG-3200 prompt, and press [Enter]. Then, the following

CLI command list is displayed on the screen.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> clicmd

clicmd Print This List

cdrhelp Help CDR Command

date Display the Current Time

dbfilehelp Help DB Backup & Restore Command

optionhelp Help Option Command

settime y,M,d,h,m,s Set Time yyyy,

M(1~12),d(1~31),h(0~23),m(0~59),s(0~5)

value = 1 = 0x1

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-67

cdrhelp

Function This command prints the list of short descriptions of the CLI commands that the

user uses to operate the system to display the CDR information. For detailed

description of the CDR format, please see "Chapter 7 Using the CDR (Call Detail

Record)."

Procedure At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'cdrhelp,' and press [Enter]. Then, the following

CLI command list related to CDR information is displayed on the screen.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> cdrhelp

cdrhelp

cdrlist

CDRclear

CDRsetlist

CDRtcpport port

CDRudpport ip1,ip2,ip3,ip4,port

Set CDR Output on UDP IP & Port

Offcdrtcp

Offcdrudp

Oncdrtcp

Oncdrudp

value = 1 = 0x1

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

Print This List

Print CDR for the Current Call

Set Default CDR Port, Clear CDR Buffer

Print CDR Setting Information

Set CDR Output on TCP Port(Default Port:8200)

Turn Off CDR Output on TCP Link(default)

Turn Off CDR Output on UDP Link(default)

Turn On CDR Output on TCP Link

Turn On CDR Output on UDP Link

5-68 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

cdrlist

cdrlistcdrlist

cdrlist

Function It displays the CDR information regarding the currently connected call.

Procedure If you want to see the CDR information regarding the currently connected call,

type 'cdrlist' at the SMG-3200 prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> cdrlist

<<<<< Current CDR >>>>>

13. DVI:

1/1/2002 14:23:23 14:23:32 201 201 165.213.81.230 40 ffff 32

value = 2 = 0x2

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-69

CDRclear

CDRclearCDRclear

CDRclear

Function Close all TCP and UDP Links, and delete all CDR information saved in the

buffer and the flash memory, and then set the CDR port as the default port. It will

revert the system back to the initial setting.

Procedure If you want to delete all CDR information, type 'CDRclear' at the SMG-3200

prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRclear

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on TCP Link

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on UDP Link

Good

>>>[CDR] Set Default CDR TCP Port, UDP Port

Good

>>>[CDR] Clear CDR TCP Buffer

Good

>>>[CDR] Clear CDR UDP Buffer

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-70 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

CDRsetlist

CDRsetlistCDRsetlist

CDRsetlist

Function It displays the current setting of the options related to the CDR of the system.

You can use other CDR CLI commands to change the setting.

Default TCP Link Off

TCP Port 8200

UDP Link Off

UDP Port Unknown

UDP IP Address Unknown

Procedure you want to see the setting of the CDR-related options, type 'CDRsetlist' at the

SMG-3200 prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRsetlist

>>>[CDR] Turn On CDR Output on TCP Link

←

tcp link is turned On.

>>>[CDR] TCP Port: 8200

←

tcp port is set as 8200.

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on UDP Link

←

udp link is turned Off.

>>>[CDR] UDP Port: Unknown

>>>[CDR] UDP IP Address = Unknown

value = 37 = 0x25 = '%'

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-71

CDRtcpport port

CDRtcpport portCDRtcpport port

CDRtcpport port

Function Set the TCP port for the TCP Link that will display the CDR output information.

It is already set as the Default(8200 port) value, and the user can use the CLI

command to change the setting.

Default [CDR] TCP Port 8200

Procedure At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'CDRtcpport' and a space, and type the TCP port

for displaying the CDR information, and then press [Enter].

For example, if you want to set the TCP port for displaying the CDR information

as 8500, type 'CDRtcpport 8500' on the screen, and press [Enter], and then the

port will be set as follows:

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRtcpport 8500

>>>[CDR] Set CDR Output on TCP Port(8500)

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-72 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

CDRudpport ip1,ip2,ip3,ip4,port

CDRudpport ip1,ip2,ip3,ip4,portCDRudpport ip1,ip2,ip3,ip4,port

CDRudpport ip1,ip2,ip3,ip4,port

Function Set the UDP IP address and UDP port for the UDP Link that will display the CDR

output information.

Procedure In the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'CDRudpport' and a space, and type the UDP IP

address and port for displaying the CDR information, and then press [Enter].

Separate the parameters from one another by means of a comma (,).

For example, if you want to set the IP address as 165.213.87.85, and the port as

8800 for the UDP Link for displaying the CDR information, type 'CDRudpport

165,213,87,85,8800' on the screen, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRudpport 165,213,87,85,8800

>>>[CDR] Set CDR Output on UDP IP = 165.213.87.85

←

udp IP address is set as 165.213.87.85.

>>>[CDR] Set CDR Output on UDP Port(8800)

←

udp port is set as 8800.

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-73

Offcdrtcp

OffcdrtcpOffcdrtcp

Offcdrtcp

Function It is used to inactivate the CDR TCP Link. That is, the CDR to be output to the

TCP Link is not generated. Basically, the CDR TCP Link is turned Off.

Procedure If you want to inactivate the current TCP CDR output Link, type 'Offcdrtcp' at

the SMG-3200 prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG400:165.213.81.230> Offcdrtcp

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on TCP Link

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-74 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Offcdrudp

OffcdrudpOffcdrudp

Offcdrudp

Function It is used to inactivate the current CDR UDP Link. That is, the CDR to be output

to the UDP Link is not generated. Basically, the CDR UDP Link is turned Off.

Procedure If you want to inactivate the current UDP CDR output Link, type 'Offcdrudp' at

the SMG-3200 prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Offcdrudp

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on UDP Link

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-75

Oncdrtcp

OncdrtcpOncdrtcp

Oncdrtcp

Function Before using this command, the port for displaying the CDR information must be

set, and the Default value is 8200. Activate the CDR to be output to the TCP Link.

Basically, the CDR TCP link output is turned Off.

Procedure 1. If you want to display the CDR information on the TCP Link, type 'Oncdrtcp'

at the SMG-3200 prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Oncdrtcp

>>>[CDR] Turn On CDR Output on TCP Link

>>>[CDR] TCP Port(8500)

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

2. If you use the Telnet program to connect to the CDR tcp port specified for the

system, the CDR information is displayed. For more details on the format of

the CDR information, please see "Chapter7 Using the CDR (Call Detail

Record)."

GVO: 1/2/2002 18:39:07 --:--:-- 201 2111 165.213.87.74

20 0026 24

DVR: 1/2/2002 18:39:08 --:--:-- - 9 - 43 0202 0

DVR: 1/2/2002 18:39:11 --:--:-- - 9 - 42 0202 0

DVR: 1/2/2002 18:39:14 --:--:-- - 9 - 41 0202 0

DVI: 1/7/2002 14:59:13 --:--:-- 201 4111 - ffff 001c 0

DVO: 1/7/2002 14:59:12 --:--:-- 201 4111 165.213.81.230

20 001c 0

DVI: 1/7/2002 15:00:25 15:00:25 4112 201 165.213.87.83 20

0010 64

DVI: 1/7/2002 11:27:32 --:--:-- 4111 201 - 20 0010 0

DVI: 1/7/2002 11:27:34 --:--:-- 4111 201 - 20 0010 0

5-76 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Oncdrudp

OncdrudpOncdrudp

Oncdrudp

Function It activates the CDR to be output to the UDP Link. Basically, the CDR UDP Link

output is turned Off. Before using this command, the UDP IP address and port for

displaying the CDR information on the UDP Link must be set. These values do

not have Defaults, and users must set them.

Procedure 1. If you want to display the CDR information on the UDP Link, type 'Oncdrudp'

at the SMG-3200 prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Oncdrudp

>>>[CDR] Turn On CDR Output on UDP Link

>>>[CDR] UDP IP Address = 165.213.87.85

>>>[CDR] UDP Port: 8800

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

2. If you make the UDP Link to the UDP Server program using the port of the

CDR UDP IP address specified for the system, the CDR information is

displayed. For more details on the CDR information, please see "Chapter7

Using the CDR (Call Detail Record)."

opened UDP socket with port no. 8800 ...

-----------------------------------------

GVO: 1/2/2002 18:39:07 --:--:-- 201 2111 165.213.87.74 20

0026 24

DVR: 1/2/2002 18:39:08 --:--:-- - 9 - 43 0202 0

DVR: 1/2/2002 18:39:11 --:--:-- - 9 - 42 0202 0

DVR: 1/2/2002 18:39:14 --:--:-- - 9 - 41 0202 0

DVI: 1/7/2002 14:59:13 --:--:-- 201 4111 - ffff 001c 0

DVO: 1/7/2002 14:59:12 --:--:-- 201 4111 165.213.81.230

20 001c 0

DVI: 1/7/2002 15:00:25 15:00:25 4112 201 165.213.87.83 20

0010 64

DVI: 1/7/2002 11:27:32 --:--:-- 4111 201 - 20 0010 0

DVI: 1/7/2002 11:27:34 --:--:-- 4111 201 - 20 0010 0

5-77

date

Function It displays the current system time in the 'day of the week month day

hour:minute:second year' format.

Procedure Type 'date' at the SMG-3200 prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> date

>>> Date: Thu Feb 21 10:32:12 2002

value = 1 = 0x1

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-78 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

dbfilehelp

Function This command displays the CLI commands related to system information Backup

and save. The DB Down/Upload function is used to save system information in a

file, or transfer the information saved in a file to the system. It is used to apply

information on one system to several other systems, or to back up system

information and recover the system from system failures. The system information

file is an ASCII file.

Procedure At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'dbfilehelp,' and press [Enter]. Then the following

DB-related CLI command list is displayed on the screen.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> dbfilehelp

dbfilehelp Print This List

getdefdb "filename" Generate File with Default DB Value

getdb "filename" Generate File from Current DB Value

putdb "filename" Update System DB from File

dump "filename" Print DB File to Console

load "filename" Write DB File from Console

value = 2 = 0x2

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-79

getdefdb "filename"

getdefdb "filename"getdefdb "filename"

getdefdb "filename"

Function It saves the default DB value of the current system in a file.

Procedure At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'getdefdb' and a space, and type the file name to

save, and press [Enter]. Then, the default DB backup file is created. The file name

must be in quotation marks (""). For example, if you want to save the default DB

in a file named defdb.txt, type 'getdefdb "defdb.txt"' at the prompt on the screen,

and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> ls

<- command used to check the file

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> getdefdb "defdb.txt"

<- The system initial information is

saved in a file named defdb.txt.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> ls

DEFDB.TXT <- defdb.txt file is created.

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-80 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

getdb "filename"

getdb "filename"getdb "filename"

getdb "filename"

It saves the DB value currently set for the system in a file.

Procedure At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'getdb' and a space, and type the file name to save,

and press [Enter]. Then, the system DB backup file is created. The file name must

be in quotation marks (""). For example, if you want to save the DB of the current

system in a file named db.txt, type 'getdb "db.txt"' at the prompt on the screen,

and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> ls

<- command used to check the file

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> getdb "db.txt"

<- The system information of the system is saved

in a file named defdb.txt.

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> ls

DB.TXT <- db.txt file is created.

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-81

putdb "filename"

putdb "filename"putdb "filename"

putdb "filename"

Function It saves the DB file transmitted via the FTP program in the system. First, use the

FTP program to send the saved DB file to the system, and use this command to

set the DB for the system.

Procedure At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'putdb' and a space, and type the file name of the

DB to save in the system, and press [Enter]. Then, the system DB is saved as the

applicable DB value. The file name must be in quotation marks ("").

For example, if you want to use the backup DB named db.txt in the system, use

the FTP program to send the DB file to the system, and type 'putdb "db.txt"' at the

prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> ls

<- Check the system information file.

DB.TXT

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> putdb "db.txt"

<- Upload the system information saved in db.txt file

to the system.

Good

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-82 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

dump "filename"

dump "filename" dump "filename"

dump "filename"

Function It displays the file in the system on the console screen.

For detailed description of system information file configuration, please see

"Appendix B. System Information File Configuration."

Procedure At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'dump' and a space, and type the name of the file

to display, and press enter [Enter]. Then, the file is displayed on the console

screen. The file name must be in quotation marks (" ").

For example, if you want to display a file named db.txt, type 'dump "db.txt"' at the

prompt, and press [Enter].

5-83

MG3200:165.213.81.230> ls

<- Check system information file.

DB.TXT

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> dump "db.txt"

<- Print the system information file on the screen.

system_db()

{

sys.dhcp()

{

sys.dhcp.client = 0 ; def(0) min(0) max(1) (0)no, (1)yes

sys.dhcp.classid = ; def()

}

sys.network_parameter()

{

sys.network.my_ipaddr = 165.213.81.230 ; def(0.0.0.0) My

IP Address

sys.network.my_gateway = 165.213.81.1 ; def(0,0,0,0) My

GateWay Address

sys.network.my_netmask = 255.255.255.0 ; def(0,0,0,0) My

Subnet Masks

sys.network.my_tos = 0; def(0) min(0) max(255) My TOS

(Typeof Service)

}

...

(abbreviated)

...

VoIP.caller_id_table(30)

{

}

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-84 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

load "filename"

load "filename"load "filename"

load "filename"

Function It creates a file on the console screen, and allows users to enter desired characters.

It is used to read the system information file from the console and save it in a file.

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'load' and a space, and type the name of the file

for entering characters, and press [Enter]. Then, the prompt on the next line will

blink. The file name must be in quotation marks (" ").

For example, if you want to display a file named digit.txt, type 'load "digit.txt"'

at the prompt on the screen, and press [Enter]. If a file named 'digit.txt' already

exists, it is overwritten, and if not, a new file is created.

2. Enter the desired character string. If you want to finish entering the character

string, type a 'period(.),' and press [Enter].

3. Corresponding files are saved in the system.

5-85

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> ls

<- Command used to check the file

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> load "db.txt"

<- The system information is saved in db.txt file.

system_db() <- Enter the system information.

{

sys.dhcp()

{

sys.dhcp.client = 0 ;

sys.dhcp.classid = ;

}

. <- Enter '.' in the first space to finish.

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> ls

DB.TXT <- db.txt file is created.

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> dump "db.txt"

<- Check the system information file.

system_db()

{

sys.dhcp()

{

sys.dhcp.client = 0

sys.dhcp.classid = ;

}

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-86 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

optionhelp

Function This command displays short descriptions of CLI commands concerning

miscellaneous options that can be set in the system.

Procedure At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'optionhelp,' and press [Enter]. Then, the

following CLI command list for setting options is displayed on the screen.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> optionhelp

optionhelp

Showoption

Off800

On800

Offhotconnection

Onhotconnection

Offbcast

Onbcast slot,port,tel

Offloopcheck

Onloopcheck frequency

Setisptype isptype

value = 1 = 0x1

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

Print This List

Show Option List of the Followings

Turn Off 800 Dial in Standalone Mode

Turn On 800 Dial in Standalone

Mode(Default)

Turn Off Hot Connection on Hook

Off(Default)

Turn On Hot Connection on Hook Off

Turn Off Speaker Connection on E&M,

LOOP(Default)

Turn On Speaker Connection on E&M, LOOP

Turn Off Detecting LOOP

Disconnection by Tone(Default)

Turn On Detecting LOOP Disconnection

by Tone

Set ISP Type

(0: Default, 1: SAMSUNG Networks)

5-87

Showoption

ShowoptionShowoption

Showoption

Function It displays the current setting status of the miscellaneous options in the system. If

the ISP type is normal, it is not displayed on the screen. Other option CLI

commands can be used to change these options.

Default 800 Off (tandem mode)

On (Standalone mode)

hot connection Off

broadcast function Off

loop disconnect check functionOff

Procedure Type 'Showoption' at the SMG-3200 prompt, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Showoption

800 : On

hot connection : Off

broadcast function : Off

loop disconnect check function : Off

value = 40 = 0x28 = '('

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-88 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Off800

Off800Off800

Off800

Function If a VoIP Call is made in the Stand-alone mode, the system automatically sets the

'800' access code so that the VoIP port is seized unconditionally and a call is

connected without having to dial the Access Code.

This CLI sets the currently active status, and if the setting needs to be maintained

during system booting, it must be saved in the CLI’s pstnmenu.

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'Off800,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Off800

Off 800 option...

value = 20 = 0x14

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-89

2. To maintain this setting during system booting, enter the CLI’s pstnmenu and

select item 15 '[15] Save & Exit,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> pstnmenu

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLI Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 15

←

Select item 15 'Save & Exit.'

Save & Exit

Good

5-90 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

On800

On800On800

On800

Function It suspends the system function to automatically set the '800' access code so that

trunk access codes such as 800, 801, 802, and 803 can be dialed and the call is

connected in the Stand-alone mode.

The user must enter the desired access code, and press the digits(default).

This CLI sets the currently active status, and if the setting needs to be maintained

during system booting, it must be saved in the CLI’s pstnmenu.

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'On800,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> On800

On 800 option...

value = 19 = 0x13

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-91

2. To maintain this setting during system booting, enter the CLI’s pstnmenu and

select item 15 '[15] Save & Exit,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> pstnmenu

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLI Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 15

←

Select item 15 'Save & Exit.'

Save & Exit

Good

5-92 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Offhotconnection

OffhotconnectionOffhotconnection

Offhotconnection

Function This command is used to clear the hot connection mode(Default).

This CLI sets the currently active status, and if the setting needs to be maintained

during system booting, it must be saved in the CLI’s pstnmenu.

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'Offhotconnection,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Offhotconnection

Off hot connection...

value = 24 = 0x18

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-93

2. To maintain this setting during system booting, enter the CLI’s pstnmenu and

select item 15 '[15] Save & Exit,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> pstnmenu

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLI Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 15

←

Select item 15 'Save & Exit.'

Save & Exit

Good

5-94 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Onhotconnection

OnhotconnectionOnhotconnection

Onhotconnection

Function If a Hook Off Event is detected in the FXS/FXO configuration, it automatically

enables a VoIP call. The routing information about access code '9' must be set

from the VoIP Outbound Routing Table. This function can be used when a 1:1

connection is made to the other’s Gateway, and the VoIP Network is used to do

Overlap Dialing. (In case VoIP is used for T/D)

This CLI sets the currently active status, and if the setting needs to be maintained

during system booting, it must be saved in the CLI’s pstnmenu.

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'Onhotconnection,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Onhotconnection

On hot connection...

value = 23 = 0x17

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-95

2. To maintain this setting during system booting, enter the CLI’s pstnmenu and

select item 15 '[15] Save & Exit,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> pstnmenu

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLI Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 15

←

Select item 15 'Save & Exit.'

Save & Exit

Good

5-96 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Offbcast

OffbcastOffbcast

Offbcast

Function It clears the function to connect the speaker through E&M and Loop, and

broadcast. (default) This CLI sets the currently active status, and if the setting

needs to be maintained during system booting, it must be saved in the CLI’s

pstnmenu.

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'Offbcast,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Offbcast

Off broadcast function...

value = 28 = 0x1c

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-97

2. To maintain this setting during system booting, enter the CLI’s pstnmenu and

select item 15 '[15] Save & Exit,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> pstnmenu

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLI Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 15

←

Select item 15 'Save & Exit.'

Save & Exit

Good

5-98 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Onbcast slot,port,tel

Onbcast slot,port,telOnbcast slot,port,tel

Onbcast slot,port,tel

Function It sets the function to connect the speaker through E&M and Loop, and broadcast.

If this function is set and a call is tried at the specified phone number, the speaker

is connected to the applicable slot and channel of the SMG-3200 system, and can

be used for broadcasting.

This CLI sets the currently active status, and if the setting needs to be maintained

during system booting, it must be saved in the CLI’s pstnmenu.

slot 1 or 2 (1:USL1, 2:USL2)

Channel the port number of the applicable slot (1~8).

Tel telephone number for connecting to the speaker.

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'Onbcast' and type the desired slot, channel,

and telephone number in parentheses, and press [Enter]. The parameter must be

in parentheses and separated by commas (,).

For example, if you want to set 700 as the telephone number for USL slot 1, and

port 1, and connects the speaker, type 'Onbcast(1,1,700)' on the screen, and press

[Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Onbcast(1,1,700)

On broadcast function : slot 1, channel 0, tel 700...

value = 56 = 0x38 = '8'

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-99

2. To maintain this setting during system booting, enter the CLI’s pstnmenu and

select item 15 '[15] Save & Exit,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> pstnmenu

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLI Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 15

←

Select item 15 'Save & Exit.'

Save & Exit

Good

5-100 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Offloopcheck

OffloopcheckOffloopcheck

Offloopcheck

Function This command is used to clear the Onloopcheck function(default).

This CLI sets the currently active status, and if the setting needs to be maintained

during system booting, it must be saved in the CLI’s pstnmenu.

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'Offloopcheck,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Offloopcheck

Off Loop Disconnect Check Function...

value = 40 = 0x28 = '('

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-101

2. To maintain this setting during system booting, enter the CLI’s pstnmenu and

select item 15 '[15] Save & Exit,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> pstnmenu

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLI Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 15

←

Select item 15 'Save & Exit.'

Save & Exit

Good

5-102 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Onloopcheck frequency

Onloopcheck frequencyOnloopcheck frequency

Onloopcheck frequency

Function In the Loop incoming mode, the Loop checks the disconnect tone periodically to

prevent the channel from being tied up.

For example, if the SMG-3200 system is in the tandem mode where VoIP enters

and then go out with seizing the Loop, the Loop may not be aware that the VoIP

part is disconnected, and thereby the Loop and SLC can be tied up. If you set this

function, the Loop checks the disconnect tone periodically to disconnect.

If you press [Enter] without entering the disconnected tone (in general, busy tone)

frequency, the system default frequency is set. 480Hz and 350Hz are available for

the frequency.

This CLI sets the currently active status, and if the setting needs to be maintained

during system booting, it must be saved in the CLI’s pstnmenu.

SMG-3200 frequency default value : 480Hz.

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'Onloopcheck' and set the desired tone

frequency, and press [Enter]. 480Hz and 350Hz are available for the Tone

frequency.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Onloopcheck

On Loop Disconnect Check Function(480Hz)...

value = 46 = 0x2e = '.'

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-103

2. To maintain this setting during system booting, enter the CLI’s pstnmenu and

select item 15 '[15] Save & Exit,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> pstnmenu

<<<<< PSTN Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] Gateway Operation Mode

[1] PSTN Rerouting Insert Digit

[2] PCM Method

[3] Dial Method

[4] SLI Signal

[5] Trunk Signal

[6] Call Control Method

[7] Ring Cadence

[8] System Tone Cadence

[9] CO Tone Cadence

[10] Gain Control

[11] Diagnosis

[12] MMC Port Block/UnBlock

[13] Display Slot Configuration

[14] Display Port Status

[15] Save & Exit

[16] Exit

Select ? 15

←

Select item 15 'Save & Exit.'

Save & Exit

Good

5-104 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

Setisptype isptype

Setisptype isptypeSetisptype isptype

Setisptype isptype

Function It sets the desired ISP type of the system. The default ISP type parameter is 0

(normal), and 1 selects the option of a Samsung Network company.

You can use this function to set options for diverse ISPs, and provide

differentiated services.

This CLI sets the currently active status, and if the setting needs to be maintained

during system booting, it must be saved in the CLI’s VoIP menu.

Default ISP type 0

Procedure 1. At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'Setisptype' and enter the desired ISP type, and

press [Enter]. For example, if you want to set a Samsung Network company as

the ISP type (1), type 'Setisptype 1' on the screen, and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Setisptype 1

ISP Type: Unitel

value = 20 = 0x14

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

5-105

2. To maintain this setting during system booting, enter the CLI’s VoIPmenu and

select item 7 '[7] Save & Exit,' and press [Enter].

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> VoIPmenu

<<<<< VoIP Configuration Menu >>>>>

[0] VoIP General Option

[1] VoIP DSP Option

[2] VoIP Gatekeeper Option

[3] VoIP Routing Table

[4] VoIP Caller ID Table

[5] VoIP Remote IP Table

[6] VoIP Remote IP Status

[7] Save & Exit

[8] Exit

Select ? 7

←

Select item 7 'Save & Exit.'

Save & Exit

Good

Exit

5-106 Chapter 5

CLI (Command Line Interface)

settime y,M,d,h,m,s

Function The user manually sets the system time.

The system time is important for the CDR information. If you set the time using

'settime,' the system changes the time on its own, so the time can be erroneous.

(The error is about 5 seconds per day.) Therefore, accurate time must be

maintained by setting time during system booting or on a periodical basis.

Procedure At the SMG-3200 prompt, type 'settime' and a space. Then type the year, month,

day, hour, minute, and second in that order, and press [Enter].

For example, if you want to enter 2002, February, 21st, 10am, 40 minutes, and 00

seconds as the system time, type 'settime 2002,2,21,10,40,0' on the screen, and

press [Enter] to set the system time as follows:

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> settime 2002,2,21,10,40,0

>>> Old Date: Thu Feb 21 10:43:35 2002

>>> New Date: Thu Feb 21 10:40:00 2002

value = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

6-1

Chapter 6 Web-based Remote Management

The SMG-3200 offers web-based management functions that enable configuration and

management of the system from a web browser. Internet web browsers are similar to that of

Windows in terms of user environment. You only need to use a mouse to configure the browsers.

In this Chapter, you can learn how to login to the web management interface of the SMG-3200.

The web management interface only provides frequently used functions for system operation

among CLI functions. For menus and detailed information you should refer to Chapter 5 CLI

(Command Line Interface).

Before you Begin

To use the web management interface of the SMG-3200, the IP address, subnet mask and default

gateway of the SMG-3200 must be set correctly to the site’s network. Such setup is described in

Chapter 4 Configuring the System.

1. Launch a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape Communicator.

Internet Explorer 5.0 has been used as an example in this paper. Please refer

to Program Help for detailed information on Internet Explorer.

2. When the web browser of your choice appears on the screen, type the SMG-3200 IP address in

the ‘Location’ field.

6-2 Chapter 6

Web-based Remote Management

3.The startup screen of the Web management interface will appear as follows.

4. To login, type your login name and password in Login ID and Password fields on the bottom

of the screen, and press [Enter]. The default login name and password are ‘smg3200’ and

‘smg3200v1’ respectively.

5. Upon completion of login, the following message will appear. Click the OK button.

6-3

6. The following main screen of the SMG-3200 web management interface will appear.

7. You should log out by clicking LogOut on the left-hand side of the menu frame once you are

finished with the Web management interface.

6-4 Chapter 6

Web-based Remote Management

Configuration and Functions of Menu

The overview of each menu of the SMG-3200 web management interface is provided below. For

more detail, please refer to Chapter 5 CLI (Command Line Interface).

MenuMenu

Menu Functions

FunctionsFunctions

Functions

Home Returns to the main screen of the SMG-3200 web management interface.

Network Configuration Sets static IP address of the SMG-3200, subnet mask, default gateway

address and TOS (Type Of Service) values.

VoIP Configuration Sets general options for VoIP services.

VoIP Caller ID Table Sets the ID for VoIP call.

VoIP Routing Table Sets the Prefix to send and receive VoIP call through IP network.

VoIP Remote IP Table For VoIP call service, at least one IP address need to be assigned in the

VoIP IP Table, which is set by VoIP Routing Table.

Gatekeeper

Configuration

When the SMG-3200 is connected to Gatekeeper, it sets information for

Gatekeeper connection.

Voice Packetizer Sets voice control options for VoIP services.

PSTN Configuration Sets general options for PSTN services such as operation mode and type

of PCM and dial.

PSTN Inbound LCR Analyzes the dialing digits coming from PBX or KTS connected to

SMG-3200.

PSTN Call Control

Method Sets the call control method to handle calls.

PSTN Gain Control Controls the call sensitivity according to the connection type.

PSTN Post Status Checks the system slots and the ports status.

MMC Port Block Decides whether to use a specific port.

Version Information Displays version information on the SMG-3200 system program.

Default DB Set Reset all items with the default values according to the database.

System Restart Restarts the SMG-3200 system.

LogOut Ends the connection of web management interface.

7-1

Chapter 7 Using the CDR (Call Detail Record)

CDR is a function that displays a detailed record about the system call. The system administrator

uses the CDR function to check the current call information through the CLI command, or uses

the TCP Link or UDP Link to receive call information.

Screen for checking current call information

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> cdrlist

<<<<< Current CDR >>>>>

28. DVO: 2/3/2002 18:46:38 18:46:53 4403 201 165.213.87.76 6a ffff 13

value = 2 = 0x2

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

7-2 Chapter 7

Using the CDR (Call Detail Record)

How to receive call information - TCP Link

1. Check the current setting.

: The current TCP Link is inactive, and the TCP Port is set as 8200.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRsetlist

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on TCP Link

>>>[CDR] TCP Port: 8200

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on UDP Link

>>>[CDR] UDP Port: Unknown

>>>[CDR] UDP IP Address = Unknown

value = 37 = 0x25 = '%'

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

2. Set the TCP port.

: Set the port (8500) for TCP Link connection.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRtcpport 8500

>>>[CDR] Set CDR Output on TCP Port(8500)

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRsetlist

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on TCP Link

>>>[CDR] TCP Port: 8500 <- port number is changed.

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on UDP Link

>>>[CDR] UDP Port: Unknown

>>>[CDR] UDP IP Address = Unknown

value = 37 = 0x25 = '%'

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

7-3

3. Activate the TCP Link.

: It is activated to generate CDR information.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Oncdrtcp

>>>[CDR] Turn On CDR Output on TCP Link <- TCP Link is On.

>>>[CDR] TCP Port(8500)

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

4. Receive CDR information.

: TCP Link is established to receive CDR information.

: In the following screen the telnet program offered by Windows 2000 is used to receive CDR

information.

E.g.) c:\> telnet 165.213.81.230 8500

7-4 Chapter 7

Using the CDR (Call Detail Record)

5. If you enter the ‘quit’ command in the TCP Link input window for receiving CDR, reception is

finished and the link is disconnected.

6. If you do not want to receive CDR information anymore

: Inactivate the TCP Link.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Offcdrtcp

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on TCP Link <- TCP Link is Off.

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

7-5

How to receive call information - UDP Link

1. Check the current setting status.

: The current UDP Link is inactive, and the UDP Port information and UDP IP Address are not set.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRsetlist

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on TCP Link

>>>[CDR] TCP Port: 8200

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on UDP Link

>>>[CDR] UDP Port: Unknown

>>>[CDR] UDP IP Address = Unknown

value = 37 = 0x25 = '%'

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

2. Set the UDP IP Address and Port.

: The IP Address and port for UDP Link connection are set.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRudpport 165,213,87,154,50000

<- There are dots (.) between Numbers.

>>>[CDR] Set CDR Output on UDP IP = 165.213.87.154

>>>[CDR] Set CDR Output on UDP Port(50000)

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> CDRsetlist

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on TCP Link

>>>[CDR] TCP Port: 8200

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on UDP Link

>>>[CDR] UDP IP Address = 165.213.87.154 <- IP Address and

>>>[CDR] UDP Port: 50000 Port number are set up.

value = 26 = 0x1a

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

7-6 Chapter 7

Using the CDR (Call Detail Record)

3. Activate the UDP Link.

: It is activated to generate CDR information.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Oncdrudp

>>>[CDR] Turn On CDR Output on UDP Link <- UDP Link is On.

>>>[CDR] UDP IP Address = 165.213.87.154

>>>[CDR] UDP Port: 50000

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

4. Receive CDR information.

: The UDP Link is made to receive CDR information.

: The following screen is for receiving UDP data.

The UDP Link requires a dedicated program for receiving UDP data.

When the UDP Link is activated but is not made yet, the CDR data is discarded.

Therefore, first make the UDP Link. Then activate it.

7-7

5. If you do not want to receive CDR information anymore.

: Inactivate the UDP Link.

SMG3200:165.213.81.230> Offcdrudp

>>>[CDR] Turn Off CDR Output on UDP Link <- UDP Link is Off.

Goodvalue = 0 = 0x0

SMG3200:165.213.81.230>

CDR Form

Call Type DVO

Delimiter :

M/D/Y 12/03/2001

Setup Time 18:20:00

Connected Time 18:21:07

Calling # 2187463

Called # 027798888

Connected IP 165.213.87.38

PSTN Port # 20

Call erm. Code 0010

Call Duration (sec.) 180

DVO : 12/03/2001 18:20:00 18:21:07 2187463 027798888 165.213.79.38 20 0010 180

DVO : 12/03/2001 18:20:00 --:--:-- 2187463 027798888 - 20 0010 180

7-8 Chapter 7

Using the CDR (Call Detail Record)

Call Type (3 bytes)

- First byte (the Connection Type)

G: the Call via Gatekeeper

D: the Direct Call to the other Gateway

- Second byte (Voice/Fax)

V: Voice Call

F: Fax Call

- Third byte (Call Direction)

O: a Outbound call of VoIP

I: a Inbound call of VoIP

R: a Rerouted call

- Examples

DVO, DVI, DFO, DFI, GVO, GVI, GFO, GFI, DVR, GVR

Delimiter

The delimiter between Call Type and Other Field

Month/Day/Year

Start-up Date (Setup date)

Setup Time

Start-up Time

* Gatekeeper Mode : the start time to send ARQ

* Direct Mode : the start time to send Setup signal.

Connected Time

A Connection start time

* The time to send or receive Connect Message

Calling #

Calling No. (Caller ID)

7-9

Called #

A called number

* The original digit that the SMG-3200 is received first.

Connected IP

IP address of other gateway which connected to the SMG-3200.

* RTP voice packet being exchanged with this connected IP.

PSTN Port

The PSTN Port number of SMG-3200

* The Outbound PSTN port number when the call is rerouted.

- 20: the 1st port of VSL1

- 40:the 1st port of VSL2

- 60: the 1st port of digital trunk

Call Term.(Termination) Code

Word value is represent with 4 bytes of Hex Value

- The first 2 bytes : Code Type

00 : Q.931 Reason Code

01 : RAS Reason Code

02 : Rerouting Reason Code

03 : The reason code of the other's abnormal close

e.g.) IP Address isn't found.

- The second 2 bytes : Code Value.

e.g.) When Q.931 reason code is Normal, it's 10.

* FFFF: The call is not terminated.

* For detailed information on the codes, please see “Appendix A Call Termination Code.”

Call Duration in seconds

The Call duration from connected time to released time

A-1

Appendix A Call Termination Code

CDR Form

Call Type DVO

Delimiter :

M/D/Y 12/03/2001

Setup Time 18:20:00

Connected Time 18:21:07

Calling # 2187463

Called # 027798888

Connected IP 165.213.87.38

PSTN Port # 20

Call Term. Code 0010

Call Duration (sec.) 180

DVO: 12/03/2001 18:20:00 18:21:07 2187463 027798888 165.213.79.38 20 0010 180

DVO: 12/03/2001 18:20:00 --:--:-- 2187463 027798888 - 20 0010 180

A-2

ppendix A

Call Termination Code

1. 00xx : Q.931 Reason Code

* Following Next Pages

2. 01xx : RAS Reason Code

3. 02xx : Rerouting Reason Code

1) for Loop/ E&M / T1E1

GOOD : 0x00

BAD : 0x01

COLLSN : 0x02

2) for PRI :

* Following Next Pages

4. 03xx : Abnormal Reason Code

A-3

Q.931 Reason Code (00xx)

Cause Value

Cause ValueCause Value

Cause Value

Class

ClassClass

Class

bits

bitsbits

bits

7 6 5

7 6 57 6 5

7 6 5

Value

ValueValue

Value

bits

bitsbits

bits

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 14 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

Nbr

NbrNbr

Nbr

Cause

CauseCause

Cause

Diagnostic

DiagnosticDiagnostic

Diagnostic

Normal event

0 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 1 0

0 1 1 1

Unsigned number

No route to specified transit network

No route to destination

Channel unacceptable

Call awarded and being delivered in

an established channel

Transit network

identity

Normal event

0 0 1

00 1

0 0 1

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 0 1

1 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

Normal call clearing

User busy

No user responding

No answer from user (user alerted)

Call rejected

Number changed

Non-selected user clearing

Destination out of order

Invalid number format

Facility rejected

Response to STATUS ENQUIRY

Normal unspecified

User supplied

diagnostic

New destination

Facility

identification

Resource unavailable

0 1 0

0 0 1 0

0 1 1 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 0 0

1 1 1 1

No circuit/channel available

Network out of order

Temporary failure

Switching equipment congestion

Access information discarded

Requested circuit/chan not available

Resources unavailable, unspecified

Discarded IE

identifier(s)

A-4

ppendix A

Call Termination Code

Q.931 Reason Code (00xx)

Cause Value

Cause ValueCause Value

Cause Value

Class

ClassClass

Class

bits

bitsbits

bits

7 6 5

7 6 57 6 5

7 6 5

Value

ValueValue

Value

bits

bitsbits

bits

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 14 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

Nbr

NbrNbr

Nbr

Cause

CauseCause

Cause Diagnostic

DiagnosticDiagnostic

Diagnostic

Service/option not available

0 1 1

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

1 1 1 1

Quality of service unavailable

Requested facility not subscribed

Bearer capability not authorized

Bearer capability not presently avail

Service or option not available

Facility

identification

Service/option not imp.

1 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

Bearer capability not implemented

Channel type not implemented

Requested facility not implemented

Only restr.Dig.Info BC. Is available

Service or option not implemented

Channel type

Facility

identification

Invalid message

1 0 1

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

1 0 0 0

1 0 1 1

1 1 1 1

Invalid call reference value

Identified channel does not exist

Call id does not exist for susp call

Call identity in use

No call suspended

Call with the req call id is cleared

Incompatible destination

Invalid transit network selection

Invalid message, unspecified

Channel identity

Clearing cause

Incompatible

parameter

A-5

Q.931 Reason Code (00xx)

Cause Value

Cause ValueCause Value

Cause Value

Class

ClassClass

Class

bits

bitsbits

bits

7 6 5

7 6 57 6 5

7 6 5

Value

ValueValue

Value

bits

bitsbits

bits

4 3 2 1

4 3 2 14 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

Nbr

NbrNbr

Nbr Cause

CauseCause

Cause Diagnostic

DiagnosticDiagnostic

Diagnostic

ETSI cause values

1 0 1

0 0 0 1

1 0 0 1

1 0 1 0

Non existent closed user group

Called user not member of cug

Called user belongs to cug

Protocol error

1 1 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 1

0 0 1 0

0 0 1 1

0 1 0 0

0 1 0 1

0 1 1 0

1 1 1 1

Mandatory information element is

missing

Message type non existing or not

implemented

Message not compatible with call

state or message type non existent or

not implemented

Information element non existing or

not implemented

Invalid information element constants

Message not compatible with call state

Recovery on timer expiry

Protocol error, unspecified

Information element

identifier(s)

Message type

Message Type

Information element

identifier(s)

Information element

identifier(s)

Message type

Timer number

Interworking

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5F Interworking, unspecified

A-6

ppendix A

Call Termination Code

Cause Value of PRI for SMG System (02xx)

No.

No.No.

No. Define

DefineDefine

Define Val

ValVal

Val Comment

CommentComment

Comment

1 CAUSE_UNASSIGNED 1 Unassigned REL_COM, DISC

2 CAUSE_NOROUTE_TX 2 no route to specified transit network DISC,

REL_COM

3 CAUSE_NOROUTE_DEST 3 no route to destination DISC, REL_COM

4 CAUSE_CH_UNEXPT 6 Channel unexpectable REL

5 CAUSE_CALL_AWARD 7 Call awarded and being delivered in an

established channel REL

6 CAUSE_NOR_CLEAR 16 Normal call clearing DISC

7 CAUSE_USER_BUSY 17 User busy REL_COM

8 CAUSE_NO_RESPONDING 18 No user responding DISC

9 CAUSE_NO_ANSWER 19 User alerting, No answer DISC

10 CAUSE_CALL_REJ 21 call reject DISC

11 CAUSE_NUM_CHG 22 Number change DISC, REL_COM

12 CAUSE_NON_SELECT 26 Non selected user clearing REL

13 CAUSE_DES_OOO 27 Destination out of order DISC

14 CAUSE_INV_NUM 28 Invalid number format REL_COM, DISC

15 CAUSE_INV_NUM 29 Facility reject REL_COM, DISC

16 CAUSE_STAT_ENRTY 30 Response to status entry STAT

17 CAUSE_NOR_UNSPE 31 Normal unspecified REL_COM, DISC

18 CAUSE_NO_CIRCUIT 34 No circuit available REL_COM, DISC

19 CAUSE_NET_OOS 38 Network out of service

20 CAUSE_TEMP_FAULURE 41 Temporary failure DISC

21 CAUSE_SW_CONGEST 42 Switching equipment congestion REL,

REL_COM

22 CAUSE_INFO_DISCARD 43 Access information discard CON, STAT

23 CAUSE_CH_NOTA 44 Circuit channel not available REL_COM,

DISC

24 CAUSE_RES_NOTA 47 Resource not available REL_COM,

DISC

25 CAUSE_QUAL_NOTA 49 Quality of service unavailable REL,

REL_COM

A-7

26 CAUSE_FAC_NOTS 50 Requested facility not subscribed DISC

27 CAUSE_BC_NOTA1 57 Barer capability not authorized REL,

REL_COM

28 CAUSE_BC_NOTA2 58 Bearer capability not authorized DISC,

REL_COM

29 CAUSE_SRVO_NOTA 63 Service or option not available, not

unspecified DISC, REL_COM

30 CAUSE_BC_NOTI 65 Bearer capability not implemented DISC,

REL_COM

31 CAUSE_CT_NOTI 66 Channel type not implemented

32 CAUSE_RF_NOTI 69 Requested facility not implemented DISC,

REL

33 CAUSE_OR_INFB 70 Only restricted digital information bearer

capability is available

34 CAUSE_SRVO_NOTI 79 Service or option not implemented

35 CAUSE_INV_CRV 81 Invalid call reference value REL,

REL_COM

36 CAUSE_IC_DNE 82 identified channel does not exist

REL_COM

37 CAUSE_SC_EXIST 83 A suspended call exist REL_COM

38 CAUSE_CI_INUSE 84 Call identify in use SUSP, REJ

39 CAUSE_NC_SUSPEND 85 No call suspended RES, REJ

40 CAUSE_RCI_CLEAR 86 Call having the requested call identify has

been cleared RES, REJ

41 CAUSE_INC_DEST 88 Incompatible destination DISC

42 CAUSE_INV_TNS 91 Invalid transit network selection DISC,

REL, REL_COM

43 CAUSE_INV_MSG 95 Invalid message unspecified REL_COM,

STAT

44 CAUSE_MIE_MISS 96 Mandatory information element is missing

REL, REL_COM, STAT

45 CAUSE_MT_NOTE 97 Message type non-existence or not

implemented STAT

46 CAUSE_MSG_NOTC1 98

Message not compatible with call state or

message type non-existence of not

implemented STAT

47 CAUSE_IE_NOTE 99 Information element non-existence or not

implemented STAT,REL,REL_COM

48 CAUSE_INV_INFOE 100 Invalid information element contents

A-8

ppendix A

Call Termination Code

STAT, REL, REL_COM

49 CAUSE_MSG_NOTC2 101 Message not compatible with call state

STAT,DISC,REL, REL_COM

50 CAUSE_ROT_EXP 102 Recovery on time expiry DISC

51 CAUSE_PRO_ERROR 111 Protocol error, unspecified DISC

52 CAUSE_INTW_UNSPE 127 Interworking unspecified

53 CAUSE_VOIP_OOS 146 VoIP Out of service

B-1

Appendix B System Information

(Database) File Structure

The system information managed by the SMG-3200 is saved in a text file which allows the

information to be backed up, restored, and edited.

- You can back up the system information externally.

- You can copy information between several systems.

- You can use the text editor to edit the system information.

File Structure

The Database file is configured in the CLI (Command Line Interface) menu structure, and has a

similar hierarchical structure to that of the CLI menu.

Hierarchical structure

file󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟system_db󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟dhcp

network_parameter

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟login_id

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn_db󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟gateway_operation_db

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟rerouting_insert_digit

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pcm_method

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟dial_method

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sli_signal

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟trunc_signal

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟call_control_method

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟ring_cadence

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

B-2

ppendix B

System Information (Database) File Structure

system_tone_cadence

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟co_tone_cadence

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟gain_control

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟diagnosis

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟inbound_lcr_table

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip_db󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟general_option

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟dsp_option

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟gatekeeper_option

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟outbound_routing_table󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟routetable_00

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟:

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟routetable_63

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟inbound_routing_table󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟routetable_00

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟routetable_31

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟remote_ip_table󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟iptable_00

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟iptable_31

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟caller_id_table

B-3

Syntax Structure

DB Types

Most of the data for SMG-3200 system DBs can be entered by assigning parameter values to

corresponding variables, but data for DBs in table format can be entered differently depending on

the type. So the characteristics of each DB will be described here.

DBs can be classified by the characteristics of the input values as follows :

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟db󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟Variable󰚟type󰚟DB󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟Number

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟String

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟IP󰚟Address

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟Table󰚟type󰚟DB󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟inbound_lcr_table

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟routing_table󰚟(inbound,󰚟outbound)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟remote_ip_table

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟caller_id_table

[ Classification of DBs by type of value]

Above structure shows that there are two types of DBs: Variable Type DBs and table type DBs.

B-4

ppendix B

System Information (Database) File Structure

Variable Type DB

When assigning values to Variable Type DBs, write the variable name in the left side, put the

allocation sign '=' in the middle, and write the value in the right side.

E.g.> sys.network.my_ipaddr = 165.213.87.145

pstn.call_control.loop_ok_time = 60

If you want to delete String DBs, write "NULL" in the right side.

E.g.> voip.option.gateway_id = NULL

As the system analyzes DB files by line, only one assignment statement must be used for one line.

If you use the semicolon(;), the part of the line after the semicolon will be commented and not

analyzed.

E.g.> voip.dsp.multi_frame_counter = 2 ; def(1) 1 ~ 10

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ commented

All variables must be predefined in the system to be recognized by the system, and they must be

used within the folder to which the applicable DB belongs.

DBs of the same type are classified as a folder, and braces ('{','}') must be used to indicate the

beginning and end of the DBs. At this time, the braces must be used in a new line, and cannot be

used with other statements.

The ending part of the folder name must be ended with parentheses '(),' and in the case of table

DBs, the maximum number of entry is written in the parenthesis of the folder name.

E.g.> System DB Configuration

󰚟󰚟󰚟 system_db()

{

sys.dhcp()

{

sys.dhcp.client = 0 ; def(0) min(0) max(1) (0)no, (1)yes

sys.dhcp.classid = ; def()

B-5

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

Not all DBs must be entered in the DB file, and you can leave only the DBs to modify, and delete

the DBs you don’t need to modify from the file before loading them.

}

sys.network_parameter()

{

sys.network.my_ipaddr = 165.213.87.145 ; My IP Address

sys.network.my_gateway = 165.213.87.1 ; My GateWay

Address

sys.network.my_netmask = 255.255.255.0 ; My Subnet Masks

sys.network.my_tos = 0 ; def(0) min(0) max(255)

My TOS(Type of Service)

}

sys.login_id()

{

sys.login.id = SMG-3200 ; Login ID

sys.login.password = SMG-3200v1 ; Login Password

}

B-6

ppendix B

System Information (Database) File Structure

Table Type DB

Table type DBs can have slightly different formats depending on the nature of the table.

The SMG-3200 system has the following four types of table DBs.

- Inbound LCR Table

- Routing Table (Inbound, Outbound)

- Remote IP Table

- Caller ID Table

1) Inbound LCR Table

The Inbound LCR Table belongs to the PSTN DB, and immediately performs Call Setup by

checking predefined prefixes for quick Call Setup even if the End Digit ('#') does not arrive. It can

have up to 32 entries, and one entry has 2 fields: 'Inbound Prefix' and 'maximum length.' One entry

must be entered on one line, and the Inbound Prefix and the maximum length field must be

separated by a comma (,).

An example of data input is given below :

2) Routing Table

The Routing Table belongs to the VoIP DB, and there are 2 types of routing tables: Outbound

Routing Tables and Inbound Routing Tables.

- Outbound Routing Table

The Outbound Routing Table has up to 64 entries, and each entry has the following Variable Type

DBs.

pstn.inbound_lcr_table(32) ; Maximum number of entries is 32

{

1234567, 8 ; First entry [0/32]

23456, 8 ; Second entry [1/32]

}

B-7

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.access_code

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.code_length

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.delete_lenth

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.insert_dight

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.iptable_1

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.iptable_2

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.iptable_start_point

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.gk_use

An example of data input is given below :

voip.outbound_routing_table(64)

{

voip.routetable_00()

{

voip.routetable.access_code = 0

voip.routetable.code_length = 1

voip.routetable.delete_lenth = 0

voip.routetable.insert_dight =

voip.routetable.iptable_1 = 0

voip.routetable.iptable_2 = 0

voip.routetable.iptable_start_point = 0

voip.routetable.gk_use = 1

}

voip.routetable_63()

{

}

B-8

ppendix B

System Information (Database) File Structure

- Inbound Routing Table

The Inbound Routing Table has up to 32 entries, and each entry has the following Variable Type

DBs.

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.access_code

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.code_length

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.delete_lenth

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.insert_dight

An example of data input is given below :

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟 voip.inbound_routing_table(32) ; Maximum number of entries is 32

{

voip.routetable_00()

{

voip.routetable.access_code = 0

voip.routetable.code_length = 1

voip.routetable.delete_lenth = 0

voip.routetable.insert_dight =

}

voip.routetable_31()

{

}

B-9

3) Remote IP Table

The Remote IP Table belongs to the VoIP DB, and has up to 32 entries. Each entry consists of

tables, and up to 32 IP addresses can be entered in one IP Table entry. When entering IP addresses

in the IP Table entry, you must enter one IP address in one line.

An example of data input is given below :

voip.remote_ip_table(32) ; Maximum number of entries is 32

{

voip.iptable_00() ; Maximum number of IPs entered in one IP

Table entry is 32

{

165.213.87.145 ; [0/32]

165.213.87.146 ; [1/32]

}

voip.iptable_01() ; Maximum number of IPs entered in one IP

Table entry is 32

{

165.213.87.144 ; [0/32]

}

voip.iptable_31() ; Maximum number of IPs entered in one IP

Table entry is 32

{

165.213.87.55 ; [0/32]

}

B-10

ppendix B

System Information (Database) File Structure

4) Caller ID Table

The Caller ID Table belongs to the VoIP DB, and has up to 30 entries. In this case 30 means the

maximum number of trunk ports that the SMG-3200 system can have. As each entry is one

Variable Type DB, it can be expressed simply as an assignment statement as follows :

DB Attribute

󰚟file󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟system_db󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟dhcp

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sys.dhcp.client󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sys.dhcp.classid󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟network_parameter

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sys.network.my_ipaddr󰚟󰚟(IP)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sys.network.my_gateway󰚟(IP)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sys.network.my_netmask󰚟(IP)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sys.network.my_tos󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟login_id

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sys.login.id󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sys.login.password󰚟(Stirng)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn_db󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟gateway_operation_db

voip.caller_id_table(30)

{

voip.calleridtable_00 = 1234

voip.calleridtable_01 = 2345

voip.calleridtable_02 = 3456

voip.calleridtable_07 = 4567

}

B-11

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gateway_operation_mode󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

pstn.gateway_inbound_lcr_option󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟rerouting_insert_digit

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.rerouting_insert_digit󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pcm_method

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.pcm_method󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟dial_method

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.dial_method.dial_type󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.dial_method.dtmf_hold_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.dial_method.calling_number_request󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.dial_method.calling_number_response󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.dial_method.called_status_request󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.dial_method.called_status_response󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.dial_method.calling_extension_response

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟sli_signal

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.sli_signal.hook_off_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.sli_signal.hook_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.sli_signal.hook_flash_min_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.sli_signal.hook_flash_max_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟trunc_signal

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.signal_type󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.seize_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.release_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.noring_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

B-12

ppendix B

System Information (Database) File Structure

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.answer_holding_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.co_hookon_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.wink_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.insert_eod󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.t1_line_coding󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.t1_signal_mode󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.e1_crc4󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.pri_country󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.pri_oper_mode󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.pri_channel_mode󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.trk_signal.pri_dial_mode󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟call_control_method

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.call_control.first_digit_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.call_control.inter_digit_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.call_control.loop_ok_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.call_control.ok_release_time󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟ring_cadence

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.ring_cadence.sli_ring_1st_on_time󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.ring_cadence.sli_ring_1st_off_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.ring_cadence.sli_ring_2nd_on_time󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.ring_cadence.sli_ring_2nd_off_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.ring_cadence.trk_ring_1st_on_time󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.ring_cadence.trk_ring_1st_off_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.ring_cadence.trk_ring_2nd_on_time󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.ring_cadence.trk_ring_2nd_off_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟system_tone_cadence

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.dial_1st_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

B-13

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.dial_1st_off_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.dial_2nd_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.dial_2nd_off_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.busy_1st_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.busy_1st_off_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.busy_2nd_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.busy_2nd_off_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.transfer_1st_on_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.transfer_1st_off_time(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.transfer_2nd_on_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.transfer_2nd_off_time(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.ringback_1st_on_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.ringback_1st_off_time(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.ringback_2nd_on_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.ringback_2nd_off_time(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.error_1st_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.error_1st_off_time󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.error_2nd_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.systone_cadence.error_2nd_off_time󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟co_tone_cadence

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.busy_1st_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.busy_1st_off_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.busy_2nd_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.busy_2nd_off_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.ringback_1st_on_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.ringback_1st_off_time(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.ringback_2nd_on_time󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.ringback_2nd_off_time(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.dial_1st_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

B-14

ppendix B

System Information (Database) File Structure

󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.dial_1st_off_time󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.dial_2nd_on_time󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.co_tone_cadence.dial_2nd_off_time󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟gain_control

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gain.sli_sli󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gain.sli_atrk󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gain.sli_dtrk󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gain.atrk_sli󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gain.atrk_atrk󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gain.atrk_dtrk󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gain.dtrk_sli󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gain.dtrk_atrk󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.gain.dtrk_dtrk󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟diagnosis

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.diag.sli_port_test󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.diag.trk_szr_test󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟pstn.diag.trk_codec_test󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟inbound_lcr_table(32)󰚟(table)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip_db󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟general_option

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.signal_type󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.gateway_id󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.caller_id_type󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.dtmf_type󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.fax_signal_type󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.h245_open_in_faststart󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.Tunneling󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟

B-15

voip.option.dil_number󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.snmp_server_ip󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(IP)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.signaling_port󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.status_port󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.wcs_port󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.option.sigk_access_port󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟dsp_option

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.audio_codec󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.echo_cancellation󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.silence_suppression󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.high_pass_fileter󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.post_filter󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.input_gain󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.voice_volume󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.multi_frame_counter󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.jitter_optimizing_factor󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.rtp_delay_limit󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.rtp_loss_limit󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.rtp_loss_check_period󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.dsp.rtp_over_limit_count󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟gatekeeper_option

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.connection󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.type󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.ip󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(IP)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.alias󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.alt_gk_ip󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(IP)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.down_option󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.h323_id󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

B-16

ppendix B

System Information (Database) File Structure

voip.gatekeeper.e164_id󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.ras_method󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.reg_type󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.gatekeeper.gw_route_in_gk_mode󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟outbound_routing_table(64)󰚟󰚟(table)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟routetable_00()󰚟󰚟(table)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.access_code󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.code_length󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.delete_lenth󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.insert_dight󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.iptable_1󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.iptable_2󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.iptable_start_point󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.gk_use󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟:

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟routetable_63()󰚟󰚟(table)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

inbound_routing_table(32)󰚟󰚟(table)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟routetable_00()󰚟󰚟(table)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.access_code󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.code_length󰚟󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.delete_lenth󰚟(Number)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.routetable.insert_dight󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟:

B-17

󰚟routetable_31()󰚟󰚟(table)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟remote_ip_table(32)󰚟󰚟󰚟(table)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟iptable_00(32)󰚟󰚟(IP)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟:

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟iptable_31(32)󰚟󰚟(IP)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟caller_id_table(30)󰚟󰚟󰚟(table)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.calleridtable_00󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟:

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟

󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟voip.calleridtable_31󰚟󰚟󰚟󰚟(String)

󰚟󰚟

C-1

Appendix C Glossary

This appendix provides brief definitions of terms used in the guide. Bold items in the text indicates

that the item is defined in the list.

AA--lawlaw

An encoding scheme that determines how an analog speech signal is converted to a digital signal.

A-law encoding is used in Europe. The other algorithm, U-law , is used in North America and Ja-

pan.

AAliaslias

A name given to each host to distinguish it from one another within an H.323 network. While us-

ing the same Internet address, each host name can be set differently.

Automatic Number IdentificationAutomatic Number Identification ((ANIANI))

ANI enables call recipients to recognize a caller’s telephone number. How this works varies from

provider to provider. This service is often provided by sending DTMF tones with a call.

Channel Channel

A channel through a device, controlling data delivery between two devices, for information deliv-

ery. As the channel is a logical connection channel rather than a physical one connecting devices, a

number of logical channels can exist even through only one physical communication line is pre-

sent.

CODEC CODEC ((COderCOder--DECoderDECoder))

Converts analog voice to digital bit stream, and digital bit stream to analog voice. It can be also re-

ferred to as a type of compression (e.g. G.729 CODEC).

Delay StartDelay Start

A trunk signal method. A call is initiated when the trunk is seized at the sending end. The Off

Hook status of the PBX at the receiving end lasts until it becomes ready to receive call data. Once

it is ready to receive, it is changed to On-Hook status. When the PBX at the sending end sends call

data, the PBX at the receiving end receives it and calls the subscriber at the receiving end. When

C-2

Appendix C

Glossary

the subscriber at the receiving end lifts the phone (in the Off-Hook status), the call begins. The

call is ended when either subscriber replaces the phone (in the On-Hook status).

Digital Signal ProcessorDigital Signal Processor ((DSPDSP))

A special computer chip designed to handle digital signals, which are fast and complex. It is

widely used for real-time processing of voice and image.

Dual Tone Multi FrequencyDual Tone Multi Frequency ((DTMFDTMF) )

An in-band signaling system that uses two simultaneous voice-band tones for dialing.

Dynamic Host Configuration ProtocolDynamic Host Configuration Protocol ((DHCPDHCP))

Provides a mechanism for allocating IP Addresses dynamically so that addresses can be reused

when hosts no longer need them.

E.164E.164

The international numbering system for remote communication using telephone.

EE&M &M ((Ear & MouthEar & Mouth)) Signaling Signaling

A method of sending and monitoring signals between signaling equipment independent of trunk

devices. E (Ear) receives open or earth signals from signaling equipment. M (Mouth) sends earth

signals or voltage status. It monitors a PBX’s status depending on the changes in voltage of E and

M. It also connects or disconnects connections.

Echo Cancellation Echo Cancellation

A process of removing echo from lines. Echo normally is created due to difference in impedance

in wires of a telephone network. Echo Cancellers store a voice sample it sends, and extracts the

voice from the returned voice in the reverse direction.

Fast Start Fast Start

Fast Start is one of the H.323 signal methods. It exchanges all information through a connection at

the connection stage, and the media connection is made without connecting to H.245. As it is

faster and simpler than Slow Start, it is now more widely used.

C-3

Fax On DemandFax On Demand ((FODFOD) )

Upon request of information using a telephone, you can receive information through fax. This ser-

vice is provided on a 24 hour a day basis.

Foreign EForeign Exxchange change OOfficeffice ((FXOFXO ))

Being connected to a signal at a loop start signal type PBX, it receives power current and RING

signals from the PBX, and sends them to the corresponding system. It forms the subscribers’ tele-

phone lines by processing voice signals at the sending end to PCM data.

Foreign ExForeign Exchange Station/Subscriberchange Station/Subscriber ((FFXSXS) )

Sends dial tones to ordinary telephones. It accommodates subscriber lines in loop start signal type

exchangers, supplies current call RING signals to subscribers, sends voice signals, and dials sig-

nals of DTMF and LOOP ON/OFF by processing them into PCM data to the corresponding sys-

tems.

File Transfer ProtocolFile Transfer Protocol ((FTPFTP) )

A client/server protocol for exchanging files with a host computer. Examples are X-modem, Y-

modem, Z-modem and Kermit.

GatekeeperGatekeeper

H.323 Gatekeeper performs important functions which allow the deployment of an accountable

and manageable multi-media network. A Gatekeeper is typically assumed to provide functions

such as directory services, address translation, bandwidth management, authentication, accounting,

authorization, and billing.

GatewayGateway

A device that connects two computer networks that use different protocols. It translates between

protocols so that computers on the connected networks can exchange data. For example, commer-

cial online services often have gateways for sending e-mail to Internet addresses.

G.711G.711

G.711 is a CCITT recommendation detailing a 74 kbps, 7kHz bandwidth audio coding algorithm.

C-4

Appendix C

Glossary

G.723.1 G.723.1

G.723.1 (previously just "G.723") is a standards-based voice codec. It was designed for video

conferencing / telephony over standard phone lines, and is optimized for real-time encode & de-

code. G.723.1 is part of the H.323 (IP) and H.324 (POTS) standards for video conferencing. Has

a compression ratio of 5.3 and /or 6.3 kbits/sec (0.7-0.8 kbytes/sec), depending on implementation.

G.729 G.729

The ITU-U G.729 recommendation contains the description of an algorithm for the coding of

speech signals at 8 Kbit/s using Conjugate-Structure Algebraic-Code Excited Linear Prediction

(CS-ACELP). The CS-ACELP coder is fed with a digital signal resulting from telephone band-

width filtering (Recommendation G.712) of an analog signal sampled at 8 kHz, followed by con-

version to 16-bit linear PCM for input to the encoder. The output of the decoder is converted back

into analog signal by similar means.

H.H.245245

H.245 is line transmission of non-telephone signals. It includes receiving and transmitting capa-

bilities as well as mode preference from the receiving end, logical channel signaling, and Control

and Indication. Acknowledged signaling procedures are specified to ensure reliable audiovisual

and data communication.

H.323 H.323

The H.323 standard provides a foundation for audio, video, and data communications across IP-

based networks, including the Internet. H.323 is an umbrella recommendation from the Interna-

tional Telecommunications Union (ITU) that sets standards for multimedia communications over

Local Area Networks (LANs) that do not provide a guaranteed Quality of Service (QoS). These

networks dominate today’s corporate desktops and include packet-switched TCP/IP and IPX over

Ethernet, Fast Ethernet and Token Ring network technologies. Therefore, the H.323 standards are

important building blocks for a broad new range of collaborative, LAN-based applications for

multimedia communications. It includes parts of H.225.0 - RAS, Q.931, H.245 RTP/RTCP and

audio/video codecs, such as the audio codecs (G.711, G.723.1, G.728, etc.) and video codecs

(H.261, H.263) that compress and decompress media streams.

Immediate StartImmediate Start

Immediate Start is a type of trunk signaling. When the PBX at the sending end seizes a trunk line

the PBX at the receiving end sends a dial tone to the former to inform of its readiness to receive

call data. When the PBX at the sending end sends call data, the PBX at the receiving end receives

C-5

them and calls out a corresponding subscriber at the receiving end. When the subscriber lifts the

phone (in Off Hook status) the telephone line is connected through. When either of the calling

parties replaces the handset, it becomes On-Hook status, and the call is terminated.

Internet ProtocolInternet Protocol ((IPIP) )

Network layer protocol in the TCP/IP stack offering a connectionless internetwork service. IP pro-

vides features for addressing, type-of-service specification, fragmentation and reassembly, and se-

curity. Defined in RFC 791.

IP AddressIP Address

32-bit address assigned to hosts using TCP/IP. An IP address belongs to one of five classes (A, B,

C, D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods (dotted decimal format). Each address

consists of a network number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network

and subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, while the host number is used to address an

individual host within the network or subnetwork. A subnet mask is used to extract network and

subnetwork information from the IP address. CIDR provides a new way of representing IP ad-

dresses and Subnet Masks. Also called an Internet address. See also Internet Protocol (IP).

Jitter Jitter

The deviation of a transmission signal in time or phase. It can introduce errors and loss of syn-

chronization in high-speed synchronous communications.

OffOff--Hook Hook

The active state of a customer telephone circuit. The term is derived from old telephone sets where

the handset (receiver), when in use, was lifted from a hook attached to a switch. The opposite con-

dition is On-Hook.

OnOn--HookHook

Means the handset of a telephone is replaced (down). The connection is closed and the bell is in

standby mode.

Quality of ServiceQuality of Service ((QoSQoS))

The quality of the services that are provided. When specified values of QoS variables are satisfied,

it indicates that the quality of the corresponding service is satisfactory.

C-6

Appendix C

Glossary

RTP (RealRTP (Real--time time TTransport Protocolransport Protocol))

An Internet protocol sending real-time data such as audio and video. Although RTP itself does not

guarantee real-time transmission, transmission application programs provide devices for streaming

data support. In general, RTP works on UDP protocol.

Slow Start Slow Start

A type of H.323 signaling. It exchanges all information through a connection at the Q931 connec-

tion stage, and connects to H.245 followed by a media connection.

Subnet MasSubnet Maskk

32-bit address mask used in IP to indicate the bits of an IP Address that are being used for the

subnet address. Sometimes referred to simply as mask.

Trivial File Transfer ProtocolTrivial File Transfer Protocol ((TFTPTFTP))

A simpler version of File Transfer Protocol (FTP ) that uses UDP (User Datagram Protocol)

rather than TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) for data transport. It is easier to program than

FTP but lacks directory and authentication services. It is often used to allow diskless workstations

to boot over the network.

Type oType of Servicef Service ((TOSTOS))

TOS parameters consist of three bits, which are used to set services on Delay, Throughput and Re-

liability.

Delay (4)Delay (4) ThroughputThroughput (2)(2) Reliability (1)Reliability (1)

Set Low High High

Clear Normal Normal Normal

C-7

Combinations of TOS bits and their meanings are shown below:

7 111 Network Control

6 110 Internetworking Control

5 101 CRITIC/ECP

4 100 Flash Override

3 011 Flash

2 010 Immediate

1 001 Priority

0 000 Routine

UU--law law

One of two algorithms used in telephony to logarithmically compress or expand digitized speech.

U-law is used in North America and Japan. A-law is the algorithm used in European networks.

Wink StartWink Start

A type of trunk signaling. When the PBX at the sending end seizes a trunk line a call is initiated.

The receiving end maintains its Off-Hook status for a short period (150-300ms, and 250ms on av-

erage) after being ready to receive call data until it becomes On-Hook. When the sending end

sends dialing related signals call information is delivered to a subscriber at the receiving end.

When the subscriber lifts the handset (Off-Hook) the call line is connected. When either party of

the telephone call replaces the handset (On-Hook), the call is terminated.

Samsung Telecoms (U.K.) Limited

Brookside Business Park, Greengate, Middleton, Manchester M24 1GS

Samsung Smg 3200 Users Manual

SMG-3200 to the manual 3985ee3f-1d7e-4455-8d0d-1400d41f13e5

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation